No Job Name Ec
User Manual: ec
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 612
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION EC GI MA EM LC CONTENTS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ....................................8 Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ...........................8 PRECAUTIONS .............................................................14 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″.............14 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T.........................................14 Engine Fuel & Emission Control System ..................15 Precautions ................................................................16 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...................17 PREPARATION .............................................................18 Special Service Tools ................................................18 Commercial Service Tools .........................................18 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM.........................................................................20 Engine Control Component Parts Location...............20 Circuit Diagram ..........................................................24 System Diagram ........................................................26 Vacuum Hose Drawing ..............................................27 System Chart .............................................................28 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...............................................29 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .......................29 Distributor Ignition (DI) System .................................31 Air Conditioning Cut Control......................................32 Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine speed) ........................................................................33 Evaporative Emission System ...................................33 On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) ..........39 Positive Crankcase Ventilation ..................................48 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ...................................50 Fuel Pressure Release ..............................................50 Fuel Pressure Check .................................................50 Fuel Pressure Regulator Check ................................51 Injector .......................................................................51 Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment .................................................................53 Idle Air Volume Learning ...........................................65 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...............................................................67 Introduction ................................................................67 Two Trip Detection Logic ...........................................67 Emission-related Diagnostic Information ...................68 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)..............................81 OBD System Operation Chart ...................................83 CONSULT-II ...............................................................88 Generic Scan Tool (GST) ........................................101 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION................103 Introduction ..............................................................103 Work Flow................................................................105 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION .........107 Basic Inspection.......................................................107 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION .............................................................123 DTC Inspection Priority Chart..................................123 Fail-safe Chart .........................................................124 Symptom Matrix Chart.............................................125 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................129 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................131 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................134 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE ..142 Description ...............................................................142 Testing Condition .....................................................142 Inspection Procedure...............................................142 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................143 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT.....................................................................146 Description ...............................................................146 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................146 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........147 Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..................147 DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)......154 Component Description ...........................................154 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................154 FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX CONTENTS ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................154 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................155 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................155 Overall Function Check ...........................................157 Wiring Diagram ........................................................158 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................159 Component Inspection.............................................162 DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR ........163 Component Description ...........................................163 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................163 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................163 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................164 DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR ......................................................................165 Component Description ...........................................165 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................165 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................165 Wiring Diagram ........................................................167 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................168 Component Inspection.............................................170 DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT) .......................................171 Component Description ...........................................171 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................171 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................171 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................172 Wiring Diagram ........................................................173 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................174 Component Inspection.............................................176 DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ...........177 Component Description ...........................................177 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................177 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................178 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................178 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................179 Wiring Diagram ........................................................183 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................184 Component Inspection.............................................188 DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR............................................................190 Component Description ...........................................190 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................190 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................190 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................191 Wiring Diagram ........................................................192 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................193 Component Inspection.............................................195 DTC P0130 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT).....................................................196 (Cont’d) Component Description ...........................................196 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................196 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................196 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................197 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................197 Overall Function Check ...........................................198 Wiring Diagram ........................................................199 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................200 Component Inspection.............................................202 DTC P0131 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT MONITORING) .....................204 Component Description ...........................................204 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................204 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................204 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................205 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................205 Overall Function Check ...........................................206 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................206 Component Inspection.............................................208 DTC P0132 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT MONITORING) ......................210 Component Description ...........................................210 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................210 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................210 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................211 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................211 Overall Function Check ...........................................212 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................213 Component Inspection.............................................215 DTC P0133 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE MONITORING).......................217 Component Description ...........................................217 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................217 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................217 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................218 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................218 Overall Function Check ...........................................219 Wiring Diagram ........................................................220 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................221 Component Inspection.............................................224 DTC P0134 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)........................................226 Component Description ...........................................226 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................226 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................226 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................227 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................227 EC-2 CONTENTS Wiring Diagram ........................................................228 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................229 Component Inspection.............................................230 DTC P0135 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT).......................................................232 Description ...............................................................232 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................232 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................232 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................232 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................233 Wiring Diagram ........................................................234 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................235 Component Inspection.............................................236 DTC P0137 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)...................237 Component Description ...........................................237 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................237 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................237 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................237 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................238 Overall Function Check ...........................................238 Wiring Diagram ........................................................239 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................240 Component Inspection.............................................243 DTC P0138 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING) .................245 Component Description ...........................................245 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................245 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................245 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................245 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................246 Overall Function Check ...........................................246 Wiring Diagram ........................................................247 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................248 Component Inspection.............................................251 DTC P0139 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (RESPONSE MONITORING).........................253 Component Description ...........................................253 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................253 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................253 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................253 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................254 Overall Function Check ...........................................254 Wiring Diagram ........................................................255 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................256 Component Inspection.............................................259 DTC P0140 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE) ..........................................261 (Cont’d) Component Description ...........................................261 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................261 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................261 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................261 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................262 Overall Function Check ...........................................262 Wiring Diagram ........................................................263 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................264 Component Inspection.............................................265 DTC P0141 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) .........................................................267 Description ...............................................................267 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................267 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................267 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................267 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................268 Wiring Diagram ........................................................269 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................270 Component Inspection.............................................271 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (LEAN SIDE) ............................................272 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................272 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................272 Wiring Diagram ........................................................274 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................275 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (RICH SIDE) .............................................279 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................279 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................279 Wiring Diagram ........................................................281 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................282 DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR ......................................................................286 Component Description ...........................................286 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................286 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................286 Wiring Diagram ........................................................288 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................289 Component Inspection.............................................290 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION.....................................291 System Description..................................................291 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................291 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................292 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................292 Possible Cause........................................................292 Overall Function Check ...........................................293 Wiring Diagram ........................................................296 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................297 EC-3 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX CONTENTS Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................308 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE ...............309 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................309 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................309 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................310 Component Inspection.............................................315 DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) ...........................316 Component Description ...........................................316 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................316 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................316 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................316 Wiring Diagram ........................................................317 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................318 Component Inspection.............................................319 DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD)..............................................................320 Component Description ...........................................320 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................320 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................320 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................321 Wiring Diagram ........................................................322 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................323 Component Inspection.............................................325 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS).........................................................................326 Component Description ...........................................326 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................326 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................327 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................327 Wiring Diagram ........................................................329 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................330 Component Inspection.............................................333 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE)......................334 Description ...............................................................334 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................335 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................335 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................335 Possible Cause........................................................336 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................336 Wiring Diagram ........................................................338 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................339 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT).....................................................................344 Description ...............................................................344 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................345 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................345 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................345 Possible Cause........................................................346 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................346 (Cont’d) Wiring Diagram ........................................................347 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................348 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION ...351 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................351 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................351 Overall Function Check ...........................................352 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................352 DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)................................355 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................355 Possible Cause........................................................355 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................356 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................357 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT).................369 Description ...............................................................369 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................369 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................370 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................370 Possible Cause........................................................370 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................371 Wiring Diagram ........................................................372 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................373 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) ......376 Component Description ...........................................376 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................376 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................376 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................376 Possible Cause........................................................377 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................377 Wiring Diagram ........................................................378 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................379 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ..............383 Component Description ...........................................383 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................383 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................383 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................384 Possible Cause........................................................384 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................384 Wiring Diagram ........................................................386 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................387 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)...........................................................................396 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................396 Possible Cause........................................................396 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................397 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................398 EC-4 CONTENTS DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH).......................................................................407 Component Description ...........................................407 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................407 On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................407 Possible Cause........................................................407 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................408 Wiring Diagram ........................................................409 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................410 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION .......412 Component Description ...........................................412 On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................412 Possible Cause........................................................412 Overall Function Check ...........................................412 DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT ...........414 Component Description ...........................................414 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................414 On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................414 Possible Cause........................................................414 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................415 Wiring Diagram ........................................................416 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................417 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) .........419 Component Description ...........................................419 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................419 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................419 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................419 Overall Function Check ...........................................420 Wiring Diagram ........................................................421 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................422 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE ...............423 Description ...............................................................423 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................424 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................424 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................424 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................424 Wiring Diagram ........................................................426 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................427 DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH .......................................................................432 Component Description ...........................................432 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................432 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................432 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................432 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................433 Overall Function Check ...........................................433 Wiring Diagram ........................................................434 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................435 DTC P0600 A/T CONTROL.........................................440 (Cont’d) System Description..................................................440 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................440 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................440 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................440 Wiring Diagram ........................................................441 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................442 DTC P0605 ECM .........................................................443 Component Description ...........................................443 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................443 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................443 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................444 DTC P1126 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.....................445 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................445 Possible Cause........................................................445 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................445 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................446 DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ....................447 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................447 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................447 Overall Function Check ...........................................448 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................448 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) ...............................................................449 System Description..................................................449 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................449 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................450 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................450 Overall Function Check ...........................................451 Wiring Diagram ........................................................452 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................453 Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................465 Component Inspection.............................................465 DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD) (COG)..................................................467 Component Description ...........................................467 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................467 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................467 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................468 Wiring Diagram ........................................................469 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................470 Component Inspection.............................................472 DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR.............473 Component Description ...........................................473 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................473 Possible Cause........................................................473 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................474 Wiring Diagram ........................................................476 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................477 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) ........................481 Description ...............................................................481 EC-5 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX CONTENTS CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................482 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................482 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................482 Possible Cause........................................................483 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................483 Wiring Diagram ........................................................485 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................486 DTC P1440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (POSITIVE PRESSURE) .................................491 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................491 Possible Cause........................................................491 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................492 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................492 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...................................493 Description ...............................................................493 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................493 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................494 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................494 Possible Cause........................................................494 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................495 Wiring Diagram ........................................................496 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................497 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CLOSE).........505 Component Description ...........................................505 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................505 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................505 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................505 Possible Cause........................................................506 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................506 Wiring Diagram ........................................................507 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................508 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW MONITORING ..............................................................513 System Description..................................................513 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................513 Possible Cause........................................................513 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................514 Overall Function Check ...........................................514 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................516 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (OPEN)...........525 Component Description ...........................................525 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................525 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................525 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................525 (Cont’d) Possible Cause........................................................526 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................526 Overall Function Check ...........................................527 Wiring Diagram ........................................................528 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................529 DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL) ....................................................534 Component Description ...........................................534 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................534 On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................534 Possible Cause........................................................534 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................535 Wiring Diagram ........................................................536 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................537 DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)........................................................538 Description ...............................................................538 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................538 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................538 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................539 Possible Cause........................................................539 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................539 Wiring Diagram ........................................................540 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................541 DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE..........................................................................544 Description ...............................................................544 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................544 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................544 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................545 Possible Cause........................................................545 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................545 Overall Function Check ...........................................546 Wiring Diagram ........................................................547 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................548 DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE .............................................................................556 System Description..................................................556 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................556 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................556 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................556 Wiring Diagram ........................................................557 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................558 DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH .......................................................................559 Component Description ...........................................559 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................559 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................559 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................559 EC-6 CONTENTS DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................559 Overall Function Check ...........................................560 Wiring Diagram ........................................................561 Diagnostic Procedure For M/T Models....................562 Diagnostic Procedure For A/T Models ....................564 IGNITION SIGNAL.......................................................566 Component Description ...........................................566 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................566 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................566 Wiring Diagram ........................................................568 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................569 Component Inspection.............................................573 INJECTOR ...................................................................574 Component Description ...........................................574 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................574 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................574 Wiring Diagram ........................................................575 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................576 START SIGNAL...........................................................579 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................579 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................579 Wiring Diagram ........................................................580 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................581 FUEL PUMP.................................................................583 System Description..................................................583 Component Description ...........................................583 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................583 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................584 Wiring Diagram ........................................................585 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................586 Component Inspection.............................................591 POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.........592 Component Description ...........................................592 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................592 (Cont’d) ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................592 Wiring Diagram ........................................................593 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................594 Component Inspection.............................................596 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ......................597 Description ...............................................................597 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................597 Wiring Diagram ........................................................598 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................599 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL.....................................602 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................602 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................602 Wiring Diagram ........................................................603 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................605 MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ............................609 Wiring Diagram ........................................................609 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......610 Fuel Pressure Regulator..........................................610 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing................................610 Ignition Coil ..............................................................610 Mass Air Flow Sensor..............................................610 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ......................610 EGR Volume Control Valve .....................................610 EGR Temperature Sensor .......................................610 Fuel Pump ...............................................................611 IACV-AAC Valve ......................................................611 Injector .....................................................................611 Resistor....................................................................611 Throttle Position Sensor ..........................................611 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater (Front) ................611 Calculated Load Value.............................................611 Intake Air Temperature Sensor................................611 EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Valve ..........611 Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater (Rear).................611 Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD)..........................611 Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor ...............................612 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-7 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC NCEC0001 ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC NCEC0001S01 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 Reference page Unable to access ECM — EC-124 ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0105 EC-163 AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 EC-165 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 AT-128 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 AT-135 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 AT-141 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 AT-147 P0600*2 EC-440 A/T DIAG COMM LINE P1605 EC-556 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 AT-163 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 AT-113 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 EC-320 CKP SENSOR (COG) P1336 EC-467 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 EC-447 CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 EC-432 CMP SEN/CIRC P0340 EC-326 COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3 P0115 EC-171 *COOLAN T SEN/CIRC P0125 EC-190 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 EC-309 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 EC-309 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 EC-309 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 EC-309 ECM P0605 EC-443 EGR SYSTEM P0400 EC-334 EGR SYSTEM P1402 EC-481 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P1401 EC-473 EGR VOL CONT/V CIR P0403 EC-344 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 AT-124 ENG OVER TEMP P0217 EC-291 ENG OVER TEMP P1217*2 EC-449 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 EC-396 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P1447 EC-513 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0450 EC-383 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0440 EC-355 EVAP SMALL LEAK P1440 EC-491 A/T COMM LINE EC-8 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d) Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 Reference page FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0464 EC-414 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P1464 EC-534 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 EC-412 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 EC-407 FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 P0171 EC-272 FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 P0172 EC-279 FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC P0180 EC-286 HO2S1 (B1) P0130 EC-196 HO2S1 (B1) P0131 EC-204 HO2S1 (B1) P0132 EC-210 HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-217 HO2S1 (B1) P0134 EC-226 HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 EC-232 HO2S2 (B1) P0137 EC-237 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 EC-245 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-253 HO2S2 (B1) P0140 EC-261 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 EC-267 IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 EC-423 P0325*2 EC-316 L/PRES SOL/CIRC P0745 AT-174 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 P0100 EC-154 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 EC-309 NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615*2 EL-249 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 — O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 AT-202 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 EC-559 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 AT-107 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 EC-369 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 EC-493 SFT SOL A/CIRC*3 P0750 AT-181 SFT SOL B/CIRC*3 P0755 AT-187 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 AT-157 THERMOSTAT FNCTN P1126 EC-445 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3 P1705 AT-193 TRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 P0120 EC-177 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 EC-351 GI KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-9 MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d) Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 Reference page VC CUT/V BYPASS/V P1491 EC-544 VC/V BYPASS/V P1490 EC-538 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4 P0500 EC-419 VEH SPD SEN/CIR A/T*4 P0720 AT-119 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0446 EC-376 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 EC-505 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1448 EC-525 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II only. *3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates. *4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time. EC-10 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d) P NO. INDEX FOR DTC =NCEC0001S02 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 — Unable to access ECM Reference page EC-124 P0000 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0100 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 EC-154 P0105 ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC EC-163 P0110 AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-165 P0115 COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3 EC-171 P0120 THRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 EC-177 P0125 *COOLAN T SEN/CIRC EC-190 P0130 HO2S1 (B1) EC-196 P0131 HO2S1 (B1) EC-204 P0132 HO2S1 (B1) EC-210 P0133 HO2S1 (B1) EC-217 P0134 HO2S1 (B1) EC-226 P0135 HO2S1 HTR (B1) EC-232 P0137 HO2S2 (B1) EC-237 P0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-245 P0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-253 P0140 HO2S2 (B1) EC-261 P0141 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-267 P0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 EC-272 P0172 FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 EC-279 P0180 FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-286 P0217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-291 P0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-309 P0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-309 P0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE EC-309 P0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE EC-309 P0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE EC-309 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-316 P0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-320 P0340 CMP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-326 P0400 EGR SYSTEM EC-334 P0403 EGR VOL CONT/V CIR EC-344 P0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-351 P0440 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-355 P0443 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-369 P0325*2 EC-11 GI MA — EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d) Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 Reference page P0446 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-376 P0450 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-383 P0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-396 P0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH EC-407 P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR EC-412 P0464 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-414 P0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4 EC-419 P0505 IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC EC-423 P0510 CLOSED TP SW/CIRC EC-432 A/T COMM LINE EC-440 P0605 ECM EC-443 P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-107 P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-113 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR A/T*4 AT-119 P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-124 P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-128 P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-135 P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-141 P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-147 P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-157 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-163 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-174 P0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC*3 AT-181 P0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC*3 AT-187 P1126 THERMOSTAT FNCTN EC-445 P1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 EC-447 P1217*2 ENG OVER TEMP EC-449 P1336 CKP SENSOR (COG) EC-467 P1401 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-473 P1402 EGR SYSTEM EC-481 P1440 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-491 P1444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-493 P1446 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-505 P1447 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-513 P1448 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-525 P1464 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-534 P1490 VC/V BYPASS/V EC-538 P0600*2 EC-12 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d) DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page GI P1491 VC CUT/V BYPASS/V EC-544 P1605 A/T DIAG COMM LINE EC-556 P1610 - P1615*2 NATS MALFUNCTION EL-249 P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3 AT-193 P1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-559 P1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-202 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II only. *3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates. *4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time. MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-13 PRECAUTIONS Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” NCEC0002 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. The SRS system composition which is available to INFINITI G20 is as follows: I For a frontal collision The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable. I For a side collision The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision). Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual. WARNING: I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized INFINITI dealer. I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the RS section. I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses (except “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”) covered with yellow insulation tape either just before the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS. Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T NCEC0003 The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: I Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. I Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) I Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL section, “Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”. I Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit. I Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc. I Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module) before returning the vehicle to the customer. EC-14 PRECAUTIONS Engine Fuel & Emission Control System Engine Fuel & Emission Control System NCEC0004 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX SEF331WC EC-15 PRECAUTIONS Precautions Precautions NCEC0005 I Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is turned off. I When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown at left. I When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin terminals when connecting pin connectors. I Before replacing ECM, perform Terminals and Reference Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. Refer to EC-134. I After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform “Overall Function Check” or “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall Function Check” should be a good result if the repair is completed. SEF289H SEF908W SEF291H MEF040D SEF217U EC-16 PRECAUTIONS Precautions (Cont’d) I I When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow the two tester probes to contact. Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and damage the ECM power transistor. Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT SEF348N Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis NCEC0006 When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following: I GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS” I EL-9, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: I GI-35, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES” I GI-24, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT” AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-17 PREPARATION Special Service Tools Special Service Tools NCEC0007 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV10117100 (J36471-A) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening front heated oxygen sensor with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut NT379 KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening rear heated oxygen sensor a: 22 mm (0.87 in) NT636 Commercial Service Tools Tool name NCEC0008 Description Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening pressure NT653 Leak detector (J41416) Locating the EVAP leak NT703 EVAP service port adapter (J41413-OBD) Applying positive pressure through EVAP service port NT704 EC-18 PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools (Cont’d) Tool name Description Hose clipper Clamping the EVAP purge hose between the fuel tank and EVAP canister applied to DTC P1440 [EVAP control system (Small leak — Positive pressure)] GI MA EM NT720 Oxygen sensor thread cleaner (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below. a: J-43897-18 (18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm) for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor b: J-43897-12 (12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm) for Titania Oxygen Sensor NT778 LC FE CL Anti-seize lubricant (PermatexTM 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads. MT AT AX NT779 SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-19 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM Engine Control Component Parts Location Engine Control Component Parts Location NCEC0009 SEF912Z EC-20 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d) GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX SEF835X EC-21 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d) SEF913Z EC-22 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d) NOTE: GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-23 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM Circuit Diagram Circuit Diagram NCEC0010 TEC776 EC-24 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM Circuit Diagram (Cont’d) GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC792 EC-25 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM System Diagram System Diagram NCEC0011 SEF907Z EC-26 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM Vacuum Hose Drawing Vacuum Hose Drawing NCEC0012 Refer to “System Diagram” on EC-26 for vacuum control system. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX SEF914Z EC-27 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM System Chart System Chart Input (Sensor) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I *1: *2: *3: *4: Camshaft position sensor Mass air flow sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Ignition switch Throttle position sensor PNP switch Air conditioner switch Knock sensor EGR temperature sensor*1 Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)*1 EVAP control system pressure sensor*1 Fuel tank temperature sensor*1 Battery voltage Power steering oil pressure switch Vehicle speed sensor Intake air temperature sensor Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)*3 TCM (Transmission control module)*2 Closed throttle position switch*4 Electrical load Fuel level sensor*1 Refrigerant pressure sensor ECM Function NCEC0013 Output (Actuator) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Injectors Distributor ignition system Power transistor Idle air control system IACV-AAC valve Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay On board diagnostic system Malfunction indicator lamp (On the instrument panel) EGR control EGR volume control valve Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) control Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) con- Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater trol (rear) EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve Cooling fan control Cooling fan relays Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS for EVAP system I EVAP canister vent control valve I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve These sensors are not used to control the engine system. They are used only for the on board diagnosis. The DTC related to A/T will be sent to ECM. Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation. This switch will operate in place of the throttle position sensor to control EVAP parts if the sensor malfunctions. EC-28 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System DESCRIPTION Input/Output Signal Chart NCEC0014 GI NCEC0014S01 Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor Engine speed and piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Throttle position sensor Throttle position Throttle valve idle position PNP switch Gear position Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed Ignition switch Start signal Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation Knock sensor Engine knocking condition Electrical load Electrical load signal Battery Battery voltage Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering operation Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)* Density of oxygen in exhaust gas ECM function MA Actuator EM LC Fuel injection & mixture ratio control FE Injector CL MT AT AX * Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation. Basic Multiport Fuel Injection System NCEC0014S02 The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the camshaft position sensor and the mass air flow sensor. Various Fuel Injection Increase/Decrease Compensation BR ST NCEC0014S03 In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below.I During warm-up I When starting the engine I During acceleration I Hot-engine operation I When selector lever is changed from “N” to “D” (A/T models only) I High-load, high-speed operation I During deceleration I During high engine speed operation I During high vehicle speed operation (M/T models) I Extremely high engine coolant temperature EC-29 SU RS BT HA SC EL IDX ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d) Mixture Ratio Feedback Control (Closed loop control) NCEC0014S04 SEF336WA The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three way catalyst can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses a heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front), refer to EC-196. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture). This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is located downstream of the three way catalyst. Even if the switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). Open Loop Control NCEC0014S05 The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion. I Deceleration and acceleration I High-load, high-speed operation I Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) or its circuit I Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) at low engine coolant temperature I High engine coolant temperature I During warm-up I When starting the engine Mixture Ratio Self-learning Control NCEC0014S06 The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot film) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between the two ratios. “Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim. “Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean. “Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment. EC-30 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d) Fuel Injection Timing NCEC0014S07 GI MA EM LC SEF337W Two types of systems are used. Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System NCEC0014S0701 Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used when the engine is running. Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System NCEC0014S0702 Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM. The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle. This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. Fuel Shut-off FE CL MT NCEC0014S08 Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds. AT Distributor Ignition (DI) System DESCRIPTION Input/Output Signal Chart Sensor NCEC0015 AX NCEC0015S01 Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor Engine speed and piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Throttle valve idle position Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed Ignition switch Start signal Knock sensor Engine knocking PNP switch Gear position Battery Battery voltage ECM function Actuator SU BR ST Ignition timPower transistor ing control RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-31 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Distributor Ignition (DI) System (Cont’d) System Description NCEC0015S02 SEF742M The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown above. The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor. e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec A°BTDC During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM. I At starting I During warm-up I At idle I At low battery voltage I During acceleration The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition. Air Conditioning Cut Control DESCRIPTION Input/Output Signal Chart Sensor NCEC0016 NCEC0016S01 Input Signal to ECM Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal PNP switch Neutral position Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle Camshaft position sensor Engine speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Ignition switch Start signal ECM function Air conditioner cut control Actuator Air conditioner relay System Description NCEC0016S02 This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off. I When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed. I When cranking the engine. I At high engine speeds. I When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high. I When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. I When engine speed is excessively low. EC-32 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine speed) Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine speed) DESCRIPTION Input/Output Signal Chart Sensor GI NCEC0017 NCEC0017S01 Input Signal to ECM ECM function MA Actuator EM Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed PNP switch Neutral position Throttle position sensor Throttle position Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Camshaft position sensor Engine speed Fuel cut control LC Injectors If the engine speed is above 3,950 rpm with no load, (for example, in Neutral and engine speed over 4,000 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,150 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled. NOTE: This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-29. CL MT Evaporative Emission System DESCRIPTION FE NCEC0018 AT AX SU BR ST RS BT SEF569XA The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and idling. EC-33 HA SC EL IDX ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d) INSPECTION EVAP Canister NCEC0019 NCEC0019S01 Check EVAP canister as follows: 1. Pinch the fresh air hose. 2. Blow air into port A and check that air flows freely through port B. SEF396T Tightening Torque NCEC0019S02 Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly between EVAP canister and EVAP canister vent control valve. AEC778A Fuel Tank Vacuum Relief Valve (Built into fuel fillerNCEC0019S03 cap) 1. 2. SEF427N Wipe clean valve housing. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi) Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.4 kPa (−0.061 to −0.035 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.49 psi) 3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. CAUTION: Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. SEF943S Vacuum Cut Valve and Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass NCEC0019S05 Valve Refer to EC-544. Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve NCEC0019S06 Refer to EC-369. Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor Refer to EC-286. EC-34 NCEC0019S08 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d) EVAP Service Port NCEC0019S09 Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak. GI MA EM LC SEF462UC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-35 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d) How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage PEF838U PEF917U SEF200U NCEC0019S10 CAUTION: I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. I Do not start engine. I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system. NOTE: Improper installation of adapter to the service port may cause a leak. With CONSULT-II 1) Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. 2) Also attach the pressure pump and hose. 3) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4) Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT MODE” with CONSULT-II. 5) Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will appear on the screen. 6) Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. 7) Remove the EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. 8) Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37. Without CONSULT-II 1) Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port and pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP service port. 2) Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of both EVAP canister vent control valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve to make a closed EVAP system. 3) To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi). 4) Remove the EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. 5) Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37. SEF323Z SEF931X EC-36 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d) EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING NCEC0020 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX SEF915Z EC-37 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d) NOTE: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hoses or purge hoses. SEF832X EC-38 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) NCEC0502 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NCEC0502S01 GI MA EM LC FE CL SEF206VA MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT SEF830X From the beginning of refueling, the fuel tank pressure goes up. When the pressure reaches the setting value of the refueling control valve (RCV) opening pressure, the RCV is opened. After RCV opens, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut valve, RCV and refueling vapor line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is released to the atmosphere. When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged during driving. The RCV is always closed during driving and the evaporative emission control system is operated the same as conventional system. WARNING: When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following: I Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop. I Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area. I Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. EC-39 HA SC EL IDX ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d) CAUTION: I Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures: a) Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely. b) Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to “Fuel Pressure Release”, EC-50. c) Disconnect battery ground cable. I Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed. I Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed. I Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses. I After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection. I Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Symptom: Fuel Odor from EVAP Canister Is Strong. 1 NCEC0502S02 NCEC0502S0201 CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). OK or NG OK © GO TO 2. NG © GO TO 3. 2 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER Does water drain from the EVAP canister? SEF596U Yes or No Yes © GO TO 3. No (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 6. No (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 7. 3 REPLACE EVAP CANISTER Replace EVAP canister with a new one. © GO TO 4. EC-40 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d) 4 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR Check Check Check Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet. visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged. GI MA EM LC SEF829T 5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts. NOTE: I Do not disassemble water separator. FE CL OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace water separator. MT AT 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection. © Repair or replace EVAP hose. AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-41 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d) 6 1. 2. a. b. c. 3. 4. a. b. c. d. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-II Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-5, “FUEL SYSTEM”. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel level sensor unit retainer. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel level sensor unit retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel level sensor unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel level sensor unit retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. SEF968X OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. EC-42 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d) 7 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. a. b. c. d. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Without CONSULT-II Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-5, “FUEL SYSTEM”. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel level sensor unit retainer. Drain fuel from the tank using a hand pump into a fuel container. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector. Remove fuel level sensor unit retainer with fuel level sensor unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel level sensor unit retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT SEF968X AT OK or NG AX OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. SU 8 CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE 1. Remove fuel filler cap. 2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B. Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank. 3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage. 4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable 3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage. BR ST RS BT HA SC SEF968X OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank. EC-43 EL IDX ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d) Symptom: Cannot Refuel/Fuel Odor From The Fuel Filler Opening Is Strong While Refueling. 1 NCEC0502S0202 CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). OK or NG OK © GO TO 2. NG © GO TO 3. 2 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER Does water drain from the EVAP canister? SEF596U Yes or No Yes © GO TO 3. No © GO TO 6. 3 REPLACE EVAP CANISTER Replace EVAP canister with a new one. © GO TO 4. EC-44 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d) 4 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR Check Check Check Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet. visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged. GI MA EM LC SEF829T 5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts. NOTE: I Do not disassemble water separator. FE CL OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace water separator. MT AT 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection. © 6 Repair or replace EVAP hose. AX SU CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling control valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. BR OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Repair or replace hoses and tubes. ST RS 7 CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE Check signal line and recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks. BT OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace filler neck tube. HA SC EL IDX EC-45 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d) 8 CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE 1. Remove fuel filler cap. 2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B. Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank. 3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage. 4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable 3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage. SEF968X OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 9. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 10. NG © Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank. 9 1. 2. a. b. c. 3. 4. a. b. c. d. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-II Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-5, “FUEL SYSTEM”. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel level sensor unit retainer. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel level sensor unit retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector. Remove fuel level sensor unit retainer with fuel level sensor unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel level sensor unit retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. SEF968X OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. EC-46 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d) 10 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. a. b. c. d. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Without CONSULT-II Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-5, “FUEL SYSTEM”. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel level sensor unit retainer. Drain fuel from the tank using a hand pump into a fuel container. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector. Remove fuel level sensor unit retainer with fuel level sensor unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel level sensor unit retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT SEF968X AT OK or NG AX OK © GO TO 11. NG © Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. SU 11 CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks. BR OK or NG OK © GO TO 12. NG © Replace fuel filler tube. ST RS 12 CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I Check one-way valve for clogging. BT OK or NG OK © GO TO 13. NG © Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. HA SC EL IDX EC-47 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d) 13 CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II 1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank. 2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose. 3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows. When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close. SEF665U Do not drop any material into the tank. OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. Positive Crankcase Ventilation DESCRIPTION NCEC0022 SEF833X This system returns blow-by gas to the intake collector. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air duct into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the intake collector under all conditions. EC-48 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Positive Crankcase Ventilation (Cont’d) INSPECTION PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve NCEC0023 NCEC0023S01 With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over the valve inlet. GI MA EM LC SEC137A Ventilation Hose 1. 2. NCEC0023S02 Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. FE CL MT ET277 AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-49 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Fuel Pressure Release Fuel Pressure Release NCEC0024 Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. SAT845J 4. NCEC0024S01 Start engine. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. SEF214Y WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. NCEC0024S02 Remove fuse for fuel pump. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF and reconnect fuel pump fuse. SEF834X Fuel Pressure Check I I I I I SEF826X 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. NCEC0025 When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. Release fuel pressure to zero. Disconnect fuel hose from fuel feed tube (engine side). Install pressure gauge between fuel hose and fuel feed tube. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. At idle speed: With vacuum hose connected Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi) With vacuum hose disconnected Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi) If results are unsatisfactory, perform Fuel Pressure Regulator Check, EC-51. EC-50 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Fuel Pressure Regulator Check Fuel Pressure Regulator Check NCEC0026 1. Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake manifold collector. 2. Plug intake manifold collector with a rubber cap. 3. Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator. 4. Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as vacuum is changed. Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases. If results are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator. GI MA EM LC SEF718B Injector REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION NCEC0027 FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS SEF910Z 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Release fuel pressure to zero. Remove accelerator wire bracket. Remove EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the bracket. Remove ventilation hose. Disconnect injector harness connectors. Disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake manifold collector. Disconnect fuel hoses from fuel tube assembly. Remove injectors with fuel tube assembly. EC-51 BT HA SC EL IDX BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Injector (Cont’d) 9. 10. I I 11. SEF703X SEF828X Expand and remove clips securing fuel injectors. Extract fuel injectors straight from fuel tubes. Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during removal. Do not bump or drop fuel injectors. Carefully install O-rings, including the one used with the pressure regulator. I Lubricate O-rings with a smear of engine oil. I Be careful not to damage O-rings with service tools or finger nails or clips. Do not expand or twist O-rings. I Discard old clips; replace with new ones. 12. Position clips in grooves on fuel injectors. I Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation. 13. Align protrusions of fuel tubes with those of fuel injectors. 14. After properly inserting fuel injectors, check to make sure that fuel tube protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors, and that flanges of fuel tubes are engaged with clips. 15. Tighten fuel tube assembly mounting nuts in two stages. : Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 1st stage: 9.4 - 10.7 (0.95 - 1.1, 6.9 - 7.9) 2nd stage: 21 - 26 (2.1 - 2.7, 16 - 19) 16. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage. EC-52 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment =NCEC0028 PREPARATION GI NCEC0028S01 I a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Make sure that the following parts are in good order. Battery Ignition system Engine oil and coolant levels Fuses ECM harness connector Vacuum hoses Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) h) Fuel pressure i) Engine compression j) EGR valve operation k) Throttle valve l) EVAP system I On models equipped with air conditioner, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is “OFF”. I On models equipped with automatic transaxle, when checking idle speed, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in “P” or “N” position. I When measuring “CO” percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. I Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear window defogger. I Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. I Make the check after the cooling fan has stopped. MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-53 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d) Overall Inspection Sequence NCEC0028S0101 SEF906XA EC-54 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 =NCEC0028S02 INSPECTION START GI 1. Visually check the following: I Air cleaner clogging I Hoses and ducts for leaks I EGR valve operation I Electrical connectors I Gasket I Throttle valve and throttle position sensor operation 2. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. MA EM LC FE CL AEC692 MT 3. Open engine hood and run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. AT AX SU SEF977U 4. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. BR OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 3. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 4. NG © GO TO 2. 2 ST RS BT REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”. With CONSULT-II © GO TO 3. Without CONSULT-II © GO TO 4. HA SC EL IDX EC-55 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d) 3 CHECK IGNITION TIMING With CONSULT-II 1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. 2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. SEF978U 3. Select “IGNITION TIMING ADJ” in WORK SUPPORT mode. 4. Touch “START”. PEF546N 5. Start and rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run at idle speed. 6. Check ignition timing with a timing light. AEC804 M/T: 15°±2° BTDC A/T: 15°±2° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. EC-56 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d) 4 CHECK IGNITION TIMING Without CONSULT-II 1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. 2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. GI MA EM LC SEF978U 3. Turn off engine and disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector. FE CL MT AT SEF863X 4. Start and rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run at idle speed. 5. Check ignition timing with a timing light. AX SU BR ST AEC804 M/T: 15°±2° BTDC A/T: 15°±2° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-57 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d) 5 ADJUST IGNITION TIMING With CONSULT-II 1. Adjust ignition timing to the specified value by turning distributor after loosening bolts which secure distributor. Without CONSULT-II 1. Adjust ignition timing to the specified value by turning distributor after loosening bolts which secure distributor. 2. Turn off engine and connect throttle position sensor harness connector to throttle position sensor. SEF837X With CONSULT-II © GO TO 3. Without CONSULT-II © GO TO 4. 6 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING With CONSULT-II 1. Start and rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run it at idle speed. 2. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-65. Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn off engine and connect throttle position sensor harness connector. SEF837X 2. Start and rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run it at idle speed. 3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-65. © GO TO 7. EC-58 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d) 7 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II 1. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. GI MA EM LC SEF058Y M/T: 800±50 rpm A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) FE Without CONSULT-II 1. Check idle speed. M/T: 800±50 rpm A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) CL OK or NG MT OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 9. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 10. AT NG © GO TO 8. AX 8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART SU Check the following. I Check IACV-AAC valve and replace if necessary. Refer to EC-423. I Check IACV-AAC valve harness and repair if necessary. Refer to EC-423. I Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.) BR With CONSULT-II © GO TO 9. ST Without CONSULT-II © GO TO 10. RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-59 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d) 9 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. 2. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds. SEF820Y 1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH 2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG (Monitor does not fluctuate.) © GO TO 13. NG (Monitor fluctuates less than 5 times.) © GO TO 11. 10 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SIGNAL Without CONSULT-II 1. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 62 and ground. 2. Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000 rpm. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG (Voltage does not fluctuate.) © GO TO 13. NG (Voltage fluctuates less than 5 times.) © GO TO 11. EC-60 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d) 11 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Stop engine. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds. 1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH 2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH Without CONSULT-II Stop engine. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 62 and ground. Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000 rpm. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © GO TO 12. 12 MA EM LC FE CL MT AT DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-51. I Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-154. I Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-574. Clean or replace if necessary. I Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-171. I Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.) © 13 1. 2. 3. 4. GI GO TO 6. AX SU BR ST CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) HARNESS Turn off engine and disconnect battery ground cable. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-199. Continuity should exist. RS BT HA OK or NG OK © GO TO 15. NG © GO TO 14. 14 SC EL REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace harness between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). © GO TO 6. EC-61 IDX BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d) 15 1. 2. 3. 4. PREPARATION FOR “CO” % CHECK With CONSULT-II Reconnect ECM harness connector. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN” and “Qd”. SEF172Y Without CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 3. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. SEF982UA © GO TO 16. EC-62 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d) 16 CHECK “CO” % 1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge. GI MA EM LC AEC692 2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed. FE CL MT SEF978U 3. Check “CO” %. Idle CO: Less than 11% 4. Without CONSULT-II After checking CO%, a. Disconnect the resistor from terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor. b. Connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor. OK or NG OK © GO TO 17. NG © GO TO 18. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-63 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d) 17 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Stop engine. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds. 1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH 2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH Without CONSULT-II Stop engine. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 62 and ground. Make sure that voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000 rpm. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 18. 18 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Connect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector to heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). I Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-51. I Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-154. I Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-574. Clean or replace if necessary. I Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-171. I Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.) © GO TO 6. EC-64 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Air Volume Learning Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION NCEC0503 NCEC0503S01 “Idle Air Volume Learning” is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: I Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced. I Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PRE-CONDITIONING SEF452Y SEF454Y SEF455Y 1. 2. 3. 4. SPECIFICATION Idle speed M/T: 800±50 rpm A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) Ignition timing M/T: 15°±2° BTDC A/T: 15°±2° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) EC-65 EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU NCEC0503S03 NCEC0503S0301 Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITIONING” (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 15 seconds. 7. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. 8. Touch “START” and wait 15 seconds. 9. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If “INCMP” is displayed, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. ITEM MA NCEC0503S02 Before performing “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. I Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle) I Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 95°C (158 - 203°F) I PNP switch: ON I Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime running light systems, if the parking brake is applied beore the engine is started, the headlamp will not be illuminated. I Cooling fan motor: Not operating I Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) I Vehicle speed: Stopped I Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates less than 0.9V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II GI BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Air Volume Learning (Cont’d) Without CONSULT-II =NCEC0503S0302 1. 2. 3. 4. SEF837X Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITIONING” (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 15 seconds. 7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown), then reconnect it within 5 seconds. 8. Wait 15 seconds. 9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed M/T: 800±50 rpm A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) Ignition timing M/T: 15°±2° BTDC A/T: 15°±2° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) NOTE: If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1) Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2) Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 3) Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory. (Refer to Basic Inspection, EC-107.) 4) When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem. 5) If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and perform “Idle air volume learning” all over again: I Engine stalls. I Erroneous idle. I Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system. EC-66 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Introduction Introduction NCEC0029 The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: Emission-related diagnostic information GI SAE Mode Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Mode 3 of SAE J1979 Freeze Frame data Mode 2 of SAE J1979 System Readiness Test (SRT) code Mode 1 of SAE J1979 1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Mode 7 of SAE J1979 MA EM LC 1st Trip Freeze Frame data Test values and Test limits Mode 6 of SAE J1979 The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below. X: Applicable —: Not applicable DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data 1st trip Freeze Frame data SRT code Test value CONSULT-II X X X X X — GST X X*1 X — X X CL MT *1: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-124.) Two Trip Detection Logic X: Applicable DTC 1st trip Items AT NCEC0030 When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip> If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL, and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. MIL FE AX SU BR —: Not applicable 1st trip DTC ST 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip displaying displaying displaying displaying Blinking Lighting up Blinking Lighting up Coolant overtemperature enrichment protection — DTC: P0217 — X — — X — X — BT Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0304 is being detected X — — — — — X — HA Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0304 is being detected — — X — — X — — SC Closed loop control — DTC: P1148 — X — — X — X — EL Fail-safe items (Refer to EC-124.) — X — — X*1 — X*1 — Except above — — — X — X X — *1: Except “ECM” EC-67 RS IDX ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information Emission-related Diagnostic Information DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC NCEC0031 NCEC0031S01 The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip DTC will not be displayed. If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-79. For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-77. These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II. 1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a problem. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests. When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame data as specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to EC-105. Then perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the problem. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires repair. How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC NCEC0031S0101 DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. With CONSULT-II With GST CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1320, P0705, P0750, etc. These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) I 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. I Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST does not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”. If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”. SEF992X FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA NCEC0031S02 The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed and absolute pressure at the moment a malfunction is detected. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data. EC-68 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d) The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For details, see EC-93. Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority 1 2 3 GI MA EM Items Freeze frame data LC Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the ECM memory. Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO ERASE EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-79. FE SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE AX NCEC0031S03 System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979. As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed. If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains “CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased. Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer’s normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items. NOTE: The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours. If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the vehicle is returned to the customer untested. NOTE: If MIL is “ON” during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection. CL MT AT SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-69 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d) SRT Item =NCEC0031S0307 The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. SRT item (CONSULT-II indication) Performance Priority*2 Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No. CATALYST 3 Three way catalyst function P0420 EVAP SYSTEM 2 EVAP control system (small leak) (negative pressure) P0440 — EVAP control system (small leak) (positive pressure) P1440*1 3 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P1447 3 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (circuit) P0130 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (lean shift monitoring) P0131 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (rich shift monitoring) P0132 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (response monitoring) P0133 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (high voltage) P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (min. voltage monitoring) P0137 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (max. voltage monitoring) P0138 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (response monitoring) P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (high voltage) P0140 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) P0135 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) P0141 3 EGR function (close) P0400 1 EGR function (open) P1402 O2 SENSOR O2 SEN HEATER EGR SYSTEM 3 *1: P1440 [EVAP control system (small leak) (positive pressure) diagnosis] is one type of SRT related diagnosis. This diagnosis, however, does not contribute to setting the SRT as “CMPLT”, when no malfunction exists in the EVAP system. Therefore, P0440 must be used instead of P1440. *2: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for models with CONSULT-II. EC-70 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d) SRT Set Timing =NCEC0031S0308 SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is shown in the table below. MA Example Self-diagnosis result Diagnosis All OK Case 1 Case 2 NG exists Case 3 + ON , OFF GI Ignition cycle + ON , OFF + ON , OFF + ON , EM P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2) P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2) P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1) P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1) P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK OK — — P0402 — — — — MT P1402 NG — NG NG (Consecutive NG) AT (1st trip) DTC 1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC DTC (= MIL “ON”) AX SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” LC FE CL SU OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK. NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG. —: Self-diagnosis is not carried out. When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will indicate “CMPLT”. , Case 1 above When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. , Case 2 above If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. , Case 3 above The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary of each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following reasons: I The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result. I The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results. I When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair. I If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. NOTE: SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”. SRT Service Procedure NCEC0031S0309 If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page. EC-71 BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d) SEF170Z *1 EC-68 *2 EC-72 *3 How to Display SRT Code EC-73 NCEC0031S0301 With CONSULT-II Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed. With GST Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown below. “INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set. EC-72 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d) GI MA EM LC SEF713Y How to Set SRT Code NCEC0031S0302 To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions. With CONSULT-II Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on “Performance Priority” in the table on EC-70. Without CONSULT-II The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes. FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-73 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d) Driving Pattern NCEC0031S0303 SEF676Y EC-74 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d) I The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc. Zone A refers to the range where the time required, for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the shortest. Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within zone A. *: Normal conditions refer to the following: − Sea level − Flat road − Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) − Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions. Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed. Pattern 1: I The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 70 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V). I The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 70 and ground is lower than 1.4V). I The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 82 and ground is less than 4.1V). Pattern 2: I When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. Pattern 3: I The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times. Pattern 4: I Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes. I The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving. I If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again. *1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again. *2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern. 1) Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle. 2) Repeat driving pattern shown below at least 10 times. I During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. 3) Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the EGR system SRT is set. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL SEF414S *3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised. Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models Set the selector lever in the “D” position with the overdrive switch turned ON. EC-75 IDX ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d) Suggested upshift speeds for M/T models Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: For quick acceleration in low altitude areas and high altitude areas [over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH) 1st to 2nd 24 (15) 25 (15) 2nd to 3rd 40 (25) 40 (25) 3rd to 4th 65 (40) 65 (40) 4th to 5th 75 (45) 75 (45) Gear change Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road conditions to ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Gear km/h (MPH) 1st 55 (35) 2nd 95 (60) 3rd 135 (85) 4th — 5th — TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II) NCEC0031S04 The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979. The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is “OK” or “NG” while being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored. Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items (9 test items). These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be displayed on the GST screen. X: Applicable —: Not applicable Test value (GST display) SRT item CATALYST Self-diagnostic test item Test limit Application 01H Max. X 02H 81H Min. X EVAP control system (Small leak) 05H 03H Max. X EVAP control system purge flow monitoring 06H 83H Min. X TID CID 01H Three way catalyst function EVAP SYSTEM EC-76 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d) Test value (GST display) SRT item Self-diagnostic test item Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) O2 SENSOR Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) Test limit Application 04H Max. X 0AH 84H Min. X 0BH 04H Max. X 0CH 04H Max. X 0DH 04H Max. X 19H 86H Min. X 1AH 86H Min. X 1BH 06H Max. X 1CH 06H Max. X 29H 08H Max. X 2AH 88H Min. X 2DH 0AH Max. X 2EH 8AH Min. X 31H 8CH Min. X 32H 8CH Min. X 33H 8CH Min. X 34H 8CH Min. X 35H 0CH Max. X TID CID 09H O2 SENSOR HEATER Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) EGR SYSTEM EGR function SRT code EM LC FE CL MT AT AX NCEC0031S05 X: Applicable DTC*1 MA SU EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) GI Test value/ Test limit (GST only) —: Not applicable BR 1st trip DTC*1 Reference page ST NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 — — — — MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0100 — — X EC-154 ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0105 — — X EC-163 AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 — — X EC-165 COOLANT T SEN/CIRC P0115 — — X EC-171 THRTL POS SEN/CIRC P0120 — — X EC-177 *COOLAN T SEN/CIRC P0125 — — X EC-190 HO2S1 (B1) P0130 X X X*2 EC-196 HO2S1 (B1) P0131 X X X*2 EC-204 HO2S1 (B1) P0132 X X X*2 EC-210 HO2S1 (B1) P0133 X X X*2 EC-217 HO2S1 (B1) P0134 X X X*2 EC-226 HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 X X X*2 EC-232 RS EC-77 BT HA SC EL IDX ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d) DTC*1 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) 1st trip DTC*1 Reference page HO2S2 (B1) P0137 X X X*2 EC-237 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 X X X*2 EC-245 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 X X X*2 EC-253 HO2S2 (B1) P0140 X X X*2 EC-261 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 X X X*2 EC-267 FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 P0171 — — X EC-272 FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 P0172 — — X EC-279 FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC P0180 — — X EC-286 ENG OVER TEMP P0217 — — X EC-291 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 — — X EC-309 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 — — X EC-309 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 — — X EC-309 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 — — X EC-309 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 — — X EC-309 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325 — — — EC-316 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 — — X EC-320 CMP SEN/CIRC P0340 — — X EC-326 EGR SYSTEM P0400 X X X*2 EC-334 EGR VOL CONT/V CIR P0403 — — X EC-344 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 X X X*2 EC-351 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0440 X X X*2 EC-355 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 — — X EC-369 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0446 — — X EC-376 EVAPO SYS PRES SEN P0450 — — X EC-383 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 — X X*2 EC-396 FUEL LEV SE SLOSH P0460 — — X EC-407 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 — — X EC-412 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0464 — — X EC-414 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 — — X EC-419 IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 — — X EC-423 CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 — — X EC-432 A/T COMM LINE P0600 — — — EC-440 ECM P0605 — — X EC-443 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 — — X AT-107 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 — — X AT-113 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 — — X AT-119 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 — — X AT-124 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) EC-78 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d) DTC*1 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) 1st trip DTC*1 Reference page A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 — — X AT-128 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 — — X AT-135 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 — — X AT-141 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 — — X AT-147 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 — — X AT-157 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 — — X AT-163 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 — — X AT-174 SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 — — X AT-181 SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 — — X AT-187 THERMOSTAT FNCTN P1126 — — X EC-445 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 — — X EC-447 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 — — X EC-449 CKP SENSOR COG P1336 — — X EC-467 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P1401 — — X EC-473 EGR SYSTEM P1402 X X X*2 EC-481 EVAP SMALL LEAK P1440 X X X*2 EC-491 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 — — X EC-493 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 — — X EC-505 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P1447 X X X*2 EC-513 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1448 — — X EC-525 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P1464 — — X EC-534 VC/V BYPASS/V P1490 — — X EC-538 VC CUT/V BYPASS/V P1491 — — X EC-544 A/T DIAG COMM LINE P1605 — — X EC-556 TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 — — X AT-193 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 — — X EC-559 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 — — X AT-202 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: These are not displayed with GST. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II) NCEC0031S06 NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8), skip steps 2 through 4. 1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. 2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”. 3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. 4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK” twice. 5. Touch “ENGINE”. EC-79 SC NCEC0031S0601 EL IDX ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d) 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. 7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) I If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). SEF823YA The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. How to Erase DTC ( With GST) NCEC0031S0602 NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8), skip step 2. 1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. 2. Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)” in AT section titled “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS”, “Self-diagnosis”. (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) 3. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST. I If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost after approx. 24 hours. I The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. 1) Diagnostic trouble codes 2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes 3) Freeze frame data 4) 1st trip freeze frame data 5) System readiness test (SRT) codes EC-80 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d) 6) Test values 7) Others Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures. GI IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) MA NCEC0031S07 EM LC FE SEF515Y I I I If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to EL-249, “IVIS (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)”. Confirm no self-diagnostic results of IVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. When replacing ECM, initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of IVIS (NATS) initialization and IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual, IVIS/NVIS. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) DESCRIPTION CL MT AT AX SU NCEC0032 BR ST RS BT SEF217U HA The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. I If the MIL does not light up, refer to EL-98, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-609. 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. SC EL IDX EC-81 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d) On Board Diagnostic System Function =NCEC0032S01 The on board diagnostic system has the following two functions. Diagnostic Test Mode KEY and ENG. Status Function Explanation of Function Mode I Ignition switch in “ON” position BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open circuit, etc.). If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit. MALFUNCTION WARNING This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected. The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in the 1st trip. I Coolant overtemperature enrichment protection I “Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)” I “Closed loop control” I Fail-safe mode Engine stopped Engine running Diagnostic Test Mode I — Bulb Check NCEC0032S0102 In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to EL-98, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-609. Diagnostic Test Mode I — Malfunction Warning NCEC0032S0103 MIL Condition ON When the malfunction is detected or the ECM’s CPU is malfunctioning. OFF No malfunction. EC-82 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION OBD System Operation Chart OBD System Operation Chart =NCEC0033 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS I I I I I NCEC0033S01 When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory. When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to “Two Trip Detection Logic” on EC-67. The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting, the counter will reset. The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven. The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in “OK” for the 2nd trip. SUMMARY CHART Items MIL (goes off) DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display) 1st Trip DTC (clear) 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear) GI MA EM LC FE NCEC0033S02 Fuel Injection System Misfire Other 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B) *1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B) CL MT AT AX For details about patterns “B” and “C” under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-85. For details about patterns “A” and “B” under “Other”, see EC-87. *1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected. *2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip. SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-83 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d) RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE” , “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” =NCEC0033S03 SEF392S *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip EC-84 freeze frame data will be cleared at the moment OK is detected. *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven once (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d) EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” Driving Pattern B =NCEC0033S04 Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. I The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. I The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction. I The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”) Driving Pattern C GI NCEC0033S0401 NCEC0033S0402 Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: 1) The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time: Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) × (1±0.1) [%] Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: I When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F). I When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F). Example: If the stored freeze frame data is as follows: Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions: Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C (158°F) I The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1). I The C counter will be counted up when (1) is satisfied without the same malfunction. I The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. I The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-85 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d) RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”NCEC0033S05 SEF393S *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC EC-86 and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehicle is driven once (pattern B) without the same malfunction. *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d) EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” NCEC0033S06 GI Driving Pattern A NCEC0033S0601 MA EM LC FE CL AEC574 I I I The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4). The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40. Driving Pattern B MT AT AX NCEC0033S0602 Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. I The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. I The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions. I The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”). SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-87 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II CONSULT-II CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE =NCEC0504 NCEC0504S01 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the fuse box cover. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START”. 5. Touch “ENGINE”. SAT845J PBR455D SEF995X 6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. SEF949Y EC-88 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II (Cont’d) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION NCEC0504S02 GI DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS INPUT ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS Item WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR DATA MONITOR (SPEC) X X X X X X DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION ACTIVE TEST DTC WORK SUPPORT DTC*1 FREEZE FRAME DATA*2 Camshaft position sensor X X Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) X Mass air flow sensor X Engine coolant temperature sensor X Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) X X X X X Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) X X X X X Vehicle speed sensor X X X X Throttle position sensor X X X X Fuel tank temperature sensor X X X EVAP control system pressure sensor X X X Absolute pressure sensor (Built into ECM) X X X EGR temperature sensor X X X Intake air temperature sensor X X X Knock sensor X X X X X X Closed throttle position switch (throttle position sensor signal) X X Air conditioner switch X X X X Power steering oil pressure switch X X Battery voltage X X Load signal X X X X Fuel level sensor LC FE X CL MT X AT SU BR X Park/neutral position (PNP) switch EM AX Ignition switch (start signal) Closed throttle position switch SRT STATUS MA X ST RS BT X X HA SC EL IDX EC-89 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II (Cont’d) DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Item WORK SUPPORT DTC*1 FREEZE FRAME DATA*2 Injectors X DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST X X X X X X IACV-AAC valve X X X X EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve X X X X X X X X X Air conditioner relay Fuel pump relay OUTPUT ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS Power transistor (Ignition timing) DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION DATA MONITOR (SPEC) X SRT STATUS X Cooling fan X X X X EGR volume control valve X X X X Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) X X X X Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) X X X X EVAP canister vent control valve X X X X Vacuum cut valve bypass valve X X X X X X Calculated load value X DTC WORK SUPPORT X X: Applicable *1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs. *2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-68. EC-90 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II (Cont’d) FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode =NCEC0504S03 Function GI Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on the CONSULT-II unit. Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly.*1 Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. EM Data monitor (SPEC) Input/Output specification of the Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the other data monitor items can be read. LC Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts some parameters in a specified range. DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. ECM part number ECM part number can be read. FE *1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. 1) Diagnostic trouble codes 2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes 3) Freeze frame data 4) 1st trip freeze frame data 5) System readiness test (SRT) codes 6) Test values 7) Others CL MT AT WORK SUPPORT MODE WORK ITEM CONDITION MA NCEC0504S04 USAGE TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ I FOLLOW THE BASIC INSPECTION IN THE SERVICE MANUAL. IGNITION TIMING ADJ I IGNITION TIMING FEEDBACK CONTROL WILL BE When adjusting initial ignition timHELD BY TOUCHING “START”. AFTER DOING SO, ing ADJUST IGNITION TIMING WITH A TIMING LIGHT BY TURNING THE CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. When adjusting the idle throttle position. AX SU BR FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE I FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DURING IDLING. CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS. When releasing fuel pressure from fuel line ST IDLE AIR VOL LEARN I THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN ECM. When learning the idle air volume RS SELF-LEARNING CONT I THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT. When clearing the coefficient of self-learning control value BT HA SC EL IDX EC-91 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II (Cont’d) WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE OPEN THE VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE AND CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS. I IGN SW “ON” I ENGINE NOT RUNNING I AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F). I NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM I TANK FUEL TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F). I WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” I WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-II WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION. NOTE: WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY. When detecting EVAP vapor leak point of EVAP system TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* I IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed *: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure. EC-92 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II (Cont’d) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE DTC and 1st Trip DTC =NCEC0504S05 NCEC0504S0501 Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX” (See EC-8.) GI MA Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data NCEC0504S0502 Freeze frame data item*1 Description DIAG TROUBLE CODE [PXXXX] I The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”, EC-8.) FUEL SYS-B1 I “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. I One mode in the following is displayed. “MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction “MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment) “MODE 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control “MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop CAL/LD VALUE [%] I The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. COOLANT TEMP [°C] I The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. or [°F] S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] I “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. I The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule. L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] I “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. I The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than short-term fuel trim. ENGINE SPEED [rpm] I The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. VHCL SPEED [km/h] or [mph] I The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ABSOL TH-P/S [%] I The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] I The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] I The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU *1: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data. BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-93 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II (Cont’d) DATA MONITOR MODE ECM input signals Main signals Description ENG SPEED [rpm] q q I Indicates the engine speed computed from the REF signal (180° signal) of the camshaft position sensor. MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] q q I The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is displayed. Monitored item [Unit] =NCEC0504S06 Remarks I When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] I “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] q I The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. I When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. I This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. I When the engine coolant temperature sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant temperature determined by the ECM is displayed. COOLAN TEMP/S [°C] or [°F] q q I The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the engine coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. HO2S1 (B1) [V] q q I The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is displayed. HO2S2 (B1) [V] q q I The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is displayed. q I Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal during air-fuel ratio feedback control: RICH ... means the mixture became “rich”, and control is being affected toward a leaner mixture. LEAN ... means the mixture became “lean”, and control is being affected toward a rich mixture. I After turning ON the ignition switch, “RICH” is displayed until air-fuel mixture ratio feedback control begins. I When the air-fuel ratio feedback is clamped, the value just before the clamping is displayed continuously. HO2S2 MNTR (B1) [RICH/LEAN] q I Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) signal: RICH ... means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively small. LEAN ... means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively large. I When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] q q I The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed sensor signal is displayed. BATTERY VOLT [V] q q I The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed. THRTL POS SEN [V] q q I The throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed. FUEL T/TMP SE [°C] or [°F] q HO2S1 MNTR (B1) [RICH/LEAN] I The fuel temperature judged from the tank fuel temperature sensor signal voltage is displayed. EC-94 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II (Cont’d) ECM input signals Main signals INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] q q I The intake air temperature determined by the signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor is indicated. MA EGR TEMP SEN [V] q q I The signal voltage of the EGR temperature sensor is displayed. EM EVAP SYS PRES [V] q I The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed. ABSOL PRES/SE [V] q I The signal voltage of the absolute pressure sensor is displayed. FUEL LEVEL SE [V] q I The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed. START SIGNAL [ON/OFF] q q I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the starter signal. CLSD THL POS [ON/OFF] q q I Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by ECM according to the throttle position sensor signal. CL CLSD THL/P SW [ON/OFF] I Indicates mechanical contact [ON/OFF] condition of the closed throttle position switch. MT q q q I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air conditioner switch as determined by the air conditioner signal. q I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal. q I [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering oil pressure switch determined by the power steering oil pressure signal is indicated. q I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical load signal and/or lighting switch. ON ... rear defogger is operating and/or lighting switch is on. OFF ... rear defogger is not operating and lighting switch is not on. Monitored item [Unit] AIR COND SIG [ON/OFF] P/N POSI SW [ON/OFF] PW/ST SIGNAL [ON/OFF] LOAD SIGNAL [ON/OFF] IGNITION SW [ON/OFF] INJ PULSE-B1 [msec] IGN TIMING [BTDC] q q q Description Remarks GI LC I After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal. FE AT AX SU BR ST RS BT I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch. q HA q I Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width compensated by ECM according to the input signals. I When the engine is stopped, a certain computed value is indicated. q I Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM according to the input signals. I When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. CAL/LD VALUE [%] I “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the current airflow divided by peak airflow. ABSOL TH·P/S [%] I “Absolute throttle position sensor” indicates the throttle valve opening angle computed by ECM according to the signal voltage of the throttle position sensor. EC-95 SC EL IDX ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II (Cont’d) Monitored item [Unit] ECM input signals Main signals I Indicates the mass airflow computed by ECM according to the signal voltage of the mass airflow sensor. MASS AIRFLOW [g·m/s] IACV-AAC/V [step] Description q I Indicates the IACV-AAC valve control value computed by ECM according to the input signals. PURG VOL C/V [%] I Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. I The opening becomes larger as the value increases. EGR VOL CON/V [step] q I Indicates the EGR volume control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. I The opening becomes larger as the value increases. AIR COND RLY [ON/OFF] q I The air conditioner relay control condition (determined by ECM according to the input signal) is indicated. FUEL PUMP RLY [ON/OFF] q I Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined by ECM according to the input signals. VC/V BYPASS/V [ON/OFF] I The control condition of the vacuum cut valve bypass valve (determined by ECM according to the input signal) is indicated. I ON ... Open OFF ... Closed VENT CONT/V [ON/OFF] I The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve (determined by ECM according to the input signal) is indicated. I ON ... Closed OFF ... Open COOLING FAN [HIGH/LOW/OFF] I Indicates the control condition of the cooling fan (determined by ECM according to the input signal). HIGH ... High speed operation LOW ... Low speed operation OFF ... Stop HO2S1 HTR (B1) [ON/OFF] I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) determined by ECM according to the input signals. HO2S2 HTR (B1) [ON/OFF] I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) determined by ECM according to the input signals. EC-96 Remarks ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II (Cont’d) Monitored item [Unit] ECM input signals Main signals Description Remarks GI I Display the condition of idle air volume learning YET ... Idle air volume learning has not been performed yet. CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has already been performed successfully. INCMP ... Idle air volume learning has not been performed successfully. IDL A/V LEAN TRVL AFTER MIL [km] or [Mile] I Distance traveled while MIL is activated Voltage [V] I Voltage measured by the voltage probe. I Pulse width, frequency or duty cycle measured by the pulse probe. Frequenty [msec] or [Hz] or [%] MA EM LC I Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to be measured. I Figures with “#”s are temporary ones. They are the same figures as an actual piece of data which was just previously measured. CL MT NOTE: I Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE FE NCEC0504S11 AT ECM input signals Main signals Description q q I The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor specification is displayed. I When engine is running specification range is indicated. SU B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] I “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. I When engine is running specification range is indicated. BR A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] I The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. I When engine is running specification range is indicated. I This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. Monitored item [Unit] MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] q Remarks AX ST RS NOTE: I Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. ACTIVE TEST MODE TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT BT NCEC0504S07 CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) I Engine: Return to the original I Harness and connector trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see FUEL INJECTION I Fuel injectors I Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM. I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) tion using CONSULT-II. I Engine: Return to the original trouble condition IGNITION TIMING I Timing light: Set I Retard the ignition timing using CONSULT-II. If trouble symptom disappears, see I Adjust initial ignition timing CHECK ITEM. HA SC EL IDX EC-97 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II (Cont’d) TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT IACV-AAC/V OPENING I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. I Change the IACV-AAC valve opening percent using CONSULT-II. CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) Engine speed changes according to the opening percent. I Harness and connector I IACV-AAC valve POWER BALANCE I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. I A/C switch “OFF” I Shift lever “N” I Cut off each injector signal one at a time using CONSULT-II. Engine runs rough or dies. I I I I I I I COOLING FAN I Ignition switch: ON I Turn the cooling fan “HIGH”, “LOW” and “OFF” using CONSULT-II. I Harness and connector Cooling fan moves high speed, low I Cooling fan motors speed and stops. I Cooling fan relays ENG COOLANT TEMP I Engine: Return to the original trouble condition I Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II. I Harness and connector If trouble symptom disappears, see I Engine coolant temperature senCHECK ITEM. sor I Fuel injectors FUEL PUMP RELAY I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) I Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” and “OFF” using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. Fuel pump relay makes the operat- I Harness and connector ing sound. I Fuel pump relay EGR VOL CONT/V I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) I Change EGR volume control valve opening step using CONSULT-II. EGR volume control valve makes an operating sound. PURG VOL CONT/V I Engine: After warming up, run engine at 1,500 rpm. I Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according volume control solenoid valve to the opening percent. opening percent using CONSULT-II. FUEL/T TEMP SEN I Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II. VENT CONTROL/V I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” with the CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector sound. I Solenoid valve VC/V BYPASS/V I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” with the CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector sound. I Solenoid valve Harness and connector Compression Injectors Power transistor Spark plugs Ignition coil Ignition wires I Harness and connector I EGR volume control valve I Harness and connector I Solenoid valve DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE SRT STATUS Mode NCEC0504S08 NCEC0504S0801 For details, refer to “SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE”, EC-69. SRT Work Support Mode NCEC0504S0802 This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status. EC-98 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II (Cont’d) DTC Work Support Mode Test mode Test item Condition NCEC0504S0803 Reference page EVAP SML LEAK P0440 EC-355 EVAP SML LEAK P1440 EC-491 EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-493 PURGE FLOW P1447 EC-513 VC CUT/V BP/V P1491 EC-544 HO2S1 (B1) P0130 EC-196 Refer to corresponding trouble diagnosis for DTC. HEATED OXYGEN SEN- HO2S1 (B1) P0131 SOR 1 (FRONT) HO2S1 (B1) P0132 MA EM LC EC-204 EC-210 HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-217 HO2S2 (B1) P0137 EC-237 HEATED OXYGEN SENHO2S2 (B1) P0138 SOR 2 (REAR) HO2S2 (B1) P0139 GI EC-245 EC-253 EGR SYSTEM P0400 EC-334 EGR SYSTEM P1402 EC-481 EGR SYSTEM FE CL MT AT AX SU BR REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE ST (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA) NCEC0504S09 SEF705Y CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. 1) “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger): I The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM. At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ... xx%” as shown at left, and the data after the malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched on the screen during “ Recording Data ... xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed. The recording time after the malfunction detection and the recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and “Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL. 2) “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger): I DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed SEF707X EC-99 RS BT HA SC EL IDX ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II (Cont’d) automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected by ECM. DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a malfunction is detected. Use these triggers as follows: 1) “AUTO TRIG” I While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is detected. I While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent. When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to GI-25, “Incident Simulation Tests”.) 2) “MANU TRIG” I If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition. SEF714Y EC-100 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Generic Scan Tool (GST) Generic Scan Tool (GST) DESCRIPTION =NCEC0035 NCEC0035S01 Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has 7 different functions explained on the next page. ISO9141 is used as the protocol. The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service manual. GI MA EM LC SEF139P GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. 2. NCEC0035S02 Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect “GST” to data link connector for GST. (Data link connector for GST is located under LH dash panel near the fuse box cover.) FE CL MT SAT845J 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in the operation manual. (*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are shown.) AT AX SU BR SEF398S 5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the tool maker. ST RS BT HA SEF416S SC EL IDX EC-101 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Generic Scan Tool (GST) (Cont’d) FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode NCEC0035S03 Function MODE 1 READINESS TESTS This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information. MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA) This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during the freeze frame. [For details, refer to “Freeze Frame Data” (EC-93).] MODE 3 DTCs This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored by ECM. MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes: I Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1) I Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3) I Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1) I Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2) I Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1) I Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7) MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS) This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored. MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS) This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving conditions. MODE 8 MODE 9 — (CALIBRATION ID) This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch “ON” position (Engine stopped). When this mode is performed, following parts can be opened or closed. I EVAP canister vent control valve open I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve closed In the following conditions, this mode cannot function. I Low ambient temperature I Low battery voltage I Engine running I Ignition switch “OFF” I Low fuel temperature I Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs. EC-102 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION Introduction Introduction MEF036D SEF233G NCEC0036 The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no problems such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other problems with the engine. It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-105. Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such problems, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the example on next page should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR SEF234G DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET SEF907L NCEC0036S01 There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trouble-shooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting. Some conditions may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected. Examples: I Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. I Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere [for the models with EVAP (SMALL LEAK) diagnosis]. ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-103 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION Introduction (Cont’d) Worksheet Sample NCEC0036S0101 MTBL0017 EC-104 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION Work Flow Work Flow NCEC0037 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT SEF510ZE *1: EC-124 *2: If time data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” is other than “0” or “1t”, refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT”, EC-146. *3: If the incident cannot be duplicated, refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. *4: If the on board diagnostic system cannot be performed, check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY”, EC-147. *5: If the malfunctioning part cannot be found, refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. *6: EC-74 *7: EC-142 HA SC EL IDX EC-105 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION Work Flow (Cont’d) DESCRIPTION FOR WORK FLOW STEP NCEC0037S01 DESCRIPTION STEP I Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”, EC-104. STEP II Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or Generic Scan Tool) the (1st trip) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and the (1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the code and the data. (Refer to EC-79.) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV. Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer. (The “Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. See EC-125.) Also check related service bulletins for information. STEP III Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs. The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results. If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. (Refer to GI-25.) If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V. STEP IV Try to detect the (1st trip) Diagnostic Trouble Code by driving in (or performing) the “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Check and read the (1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or Generic Scan Tool. During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results. If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. (Refer to GI-25.) In case the “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is not available, perform the “OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK” instead. The (1st trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative. The “NG” result of the “OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK” is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection. STEP V Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV. If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX. If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-107.) If CONSULT-II is available, perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE”. (Refer to EC-142.) (If malfunction is detected, proceed to “REPAIR/ REPLACE”.) Then perform inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-125.) STEP VI Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”. Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-134. The “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. For details, refer to GI section (“HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”, “Circuit Inspection”). Repair or replace the malfunction parts. If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. STEP VII Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint. Perform the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000 or 0505] is detected. If the incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method from the previous one. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-79.) EC-106 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection Basic Inspection NCEC0038 Precaution: Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical loads applied; I Headlamp switch is OFF, I Air conditioner switch is OFF, I Rear window defogger switch is OFF, I Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. 1 GI MA EM INSPECTION START 1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related problem, or a current need for scheduled maintenance. 2. Open engine hood and check the following: I Harness connectors for improper connections I Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections I Wiring for improper connections, pinches and cuts I Air cleaner clogging I Hoses and ducts for leaks LC FE CL MT AT SEF983U © AX GO TO 2. SU 2 CHECK THROTTLE OPENER OPERATION-I Confirm that there is a clearance between throttle drum and stopper. BR ST RS BT SEF864X HA OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © GO TO 3. 3 SC CHECK THROTTLE OPENER FIXING BOLTS Check throttle opener fixing bolts for loosening. OK or NG OK © Repair or replace throttle body assembly. NG © Retighten the fixing bolts. EC-107 EL IDX TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 4 CHECK THROTTLE OPENER OPERATION-II 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Confirm that throttle opener rod moves backward and there is a clearance between throttle drum and throttle opener rod. SEF865X OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © GO TO 5. 5 CHECK VACUUM SOURCE FOR THROTTLE OPENER 1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to throttle opener. 2. Check vacuum existence with engine running. SEF866X OK or NG OK © Repair or replace throttle body assembly. NG © GO TO 6. EC-108 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 6 CHECK VACUUM HOSE 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove the vacuum hose. 3. Check the vacuum hose for splits, kinks and clogging. GI MA EM LC SEF109L FE OK or NG OK © Clean vacuum port by blowing air. NG © Replace vacuum hose. 7 CL MT CHECK THROTTLE DRUM OPERATION Confirm that throttle drum moves to contact the stopper. AT AX SU BR SEF864X OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © GO TO 8. 8 ST RS CHECK ACCELERATOR WIRE INSTALLATION BT 1. Stop engine. 2. Check accelerator wire for slack. OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © Adjust accelerator wire. Refer to FE-3, “Adjusting Accelerator Wire”. 9 HA SC EL CHECK THROTTLE VALVE OPERATION 1. Remove intake air ducts. 2. Check throttle valve operation when moving throttle drum by hand. OK or NG OK © Retighten the throttle drum fixing nuts. NG © Clean the throttle body and throttle valve. EC-109 IDX TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 10 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I NOTE: Always check ignition timing before performing the following. 1. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature. 2. Stop engine. 3. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener. 4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump as shown below. SEF793WA 5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum is free from the throttle opener rod. With CONSULT-II © GO TO 11. Without CONSULT-II © GO TO 17. EC-110 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 11 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. Select “TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Read “CLSD THL/P SW” signal under the following conditions. I Insert a 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure and check the signal. GI MA EM LC FE SEF862X CL MT AT AX SEF715Y “CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “ON” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge. “CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “OFF” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge. OK or NG OK © GO TO 14. NG © GO TO 12. SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-111 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 12 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I With CONSULT-II 1. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts. 2. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to test No. 10. During adjustment, vacuum should be applied. 3. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure. SEF862X 4. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches to “OFF”. SEF867X SEF715Y © GO TO 13. EC-112 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 13 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II With CONSULT-II 1. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows. I Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it when “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches from “OFF” to “ON”, then temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts. GI MA EM LC SEF867X 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Make sure two or three times that the signal is “ON” when the throttle valve is closed and “OFF” when it is opened. Remove 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge. Make sure two or three times that the signal remains “OFF” when the throttle valve is closed. Tighten throttle position sensor. Check the “CLSD THL/P SW” signal again. The signal remains “OFF” while closing throttle valve. FE CL MT OK or NG OK © GO TO 14. NG © GO TO 12. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-113 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 14 RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY With CONSULT-II NOTE: Always warm up engine to normal operating temperature. If engine is cool, the throttle position sensor idle position memory will not be reset correctly. 1. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to Test No. 10. 2. Attach blind cap to vacuum port from which vacuum hose to throttle opener was disconnected. 3. Start engine. 4. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature. 5. Select “TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. 6. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.) 7. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds. SEF864V 8. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until “CLSD THL POS” signal changes to “ON”. SEF715Y © GO TO 15. EC-114 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 15 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. CHECK IGNITION TIMING-I With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Release vacuum from throttle opener. Remove vacuum pump and vacuum hose from throttle opener. Reinstall original vacuum hose to throttle opener securely. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “IGNITION TIMING ADJ” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light. GI MA EM LC FE CL SEF284G Ignition timing: M/T 15°±2° BTDC A/T 15°±2° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) MT AT OK or NG OK © GO TO 16. NG © 1. Adjust ignition timing by turning distributor. Refer to “Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment”, EC-53. 2. GO TO 16. AX SU 16 CHECK IGNITION TIMING-II BR With CONSULT-II Touch “MODE” or “BACK”. (Cancel “IGNITION TIMING ADJ” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.) Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light. ST RS BT HA SEF284G Ignition timing: M/T 15°±2° BTDC A/T 15°±2° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) SC OK or NG OK © GO TO 30. NG © GO TO 23. EL IDX EC-115 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 17 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II Without CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector. 2. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions. SEF711X I Insert the 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between the stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure. SEF862X “Continuity should exist” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge. “Continuity should not exist” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge. OK or NG OK © GO TO 20. NG © GO TO 18. EC-116 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 18 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I Without CONSULT-II 1. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts. 2. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to Test No. 10. During adjustment, vacuum should be applied. 3. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure. GI MA EM LC SEF862X FE CL MT AT SEF711X 4. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until continuity does not exist. AX SU BR ST SEF867X © RS BT GO TO 19. HA SC EL IDX EC-117 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 19 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II Without CONSULT-II 1. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows. I Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it when the continuity comes to exist, then temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts. SEF867X 2. Make sure two or three times that the continuity exists when the throttle valve is closed and continuity does not exist when it is opened. 3. Remove 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge. 4. Make sure two or three times that the continuity does not exist when the throttle valve is closed. 5. Tighten throttle position sensor. 6. Check the continuity again. Continuity does not exist while closing the throttle valve. OK or NG OK © GO TO 20. NG © GO TO 18. 20 RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY Without CONSULT-II NOTE: Always warm up engine to normal operating temperature. If engine is cool, the throttle position sensor idle position memory will not be reset correctly. 1. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to Test No. 10. 2. Attach blind cap to vacuum port from which vacuum hose to throttle opener was disconnected. 3. Start engine. 4. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature. 5. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.) 6. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds. SEF864V 7. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7, 20 times. © GO TO 21. EC-118 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 21 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. CHECK IGNITION TIMING-I Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Release vacuum from throttle opener. Remove vacuum pump and vacuum hose from throttle opener. Reinstall original vacuum hose to throttle opener securely. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine and disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector. GI MA EM LC FE SEF863X 7. Start engine. 8. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light. CL MT AT AX SU SEF284G Ignition timing: M/T 15°±2° BTDC A/T 15°±2° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) BR OK or NG OK © GO TO 22. NG © 1. Adjust ignition timing by turning distributor. Refer to “Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment”, EC-53. 2. GO TO 22. ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-119 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 22 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING-II Stop engine. Reconnect throttle position sensor harness connector. Start engine and let it idle. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light. SEF984U Ignition timing: M/T 15°±2° BTDC A/T 15°±2° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) OK or NG OK © GO TO 33. NG © GO TO 23. 23 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-65. Is the result CMPLT or INCMP? CMPLT or INCMP CMPLT © GO TO 24. INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”. 24 CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN Check ignition timing again. Refer to Test No. 16 (With CONSULT-II) or 22 (Without CONSULT-II). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 30. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 33. NG © GO TO 25. 25 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an air leak from PCV hose and after IACV-AAC valve. OK or NG OK © GO TO 27. NG © GO TO 26. 26 REPAIR MALFUNCTION 1. Stop engine. 2. Repair or replace malfunctioning part. © GO TO 23. EC-120 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 27 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the IACV-AAC valve circuit and function. Refer to EC-423. GI OK or NG OK © GO TO 29. NG © GO TO 28. 28 MA EM REPAIR MALFUNCTION Repair or replace malfunction part following the “Diagnostic Procedure” corresponding the detected malfunction. © 29 GO TO 23. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.) 2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “IVIS (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)”, EC-81. © 30 LC FE CL GO TO 23. MT CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. 3. Check idle speed. M/T: 800±50 rpm A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) AT AX OK or NG OK © GO TO 36. NG © GO TO 31. SU BR 31 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-65. Is the result CMPLT or INCMP? ST CMPLT or INCMP CMPLT © GO TO 32. INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”. 32 RS BT CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check idle speed. M/T: 800±50 rpm A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) OK or NG OK © GO TO 36. NG © GO TO 25. HA SC EL IDX EC-121 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Basic Inspection (Cont’d) 33 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. M/T: 800±50 rpm A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) OK or NG OK © GO TO 36. NG © GO TO 34. 34 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-65. Is the result CMPLT or INCMP? CMPLT or INCMP CMPLT © GO TO 35. INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”. 35 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. M/T: 800±50 rpm A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) OK or NG OK © GO TO 36. NG © GO TO 25. 36 ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC After this inspection, unnecessary DTC No. might be displayed. Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-79 and “HOW TO ERASE DTC”, AT-38. © INSPECTION END EC-122 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION DTC Inspection Priority Chart DTC Inspection Priority Chart NCEC0039 If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. Priority 1 2 3 GI Detected items (DTC) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I P0100 Mass air flow sensor P0110 Intake air temperature sensor P0115, P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor P0120 Throttle position sensor P0180 Fuel tank temperature sensor P0325 Knock sensor P0340 Camshaft position sensor P0403 EGR volume control valve P0460, P0461, P0464, P1464 Fuel level sensor P0500 Vehicle speed sensor P0605 ECM P1126 Thermostat function P1605 A/T diagnosis communication line P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I P0105 Absolute pressure sensor P0130-P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) P0135 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) P0137-P0140 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) P0141 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) P0217 Coolant overtemperature enrichment protection P0335, P1336 Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) P0443, P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve P0446, P1446, P1448 EVAP canister vent control valve P0450 EVAP control system pressure sensor P0510 Closed throttle position switch P0705-P0725, P0740-P1760 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches P1401 EGR temperature sensor P1447 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P1490, P1491 Vacuum cut valve bypass valve I I I I I I I I I I P0171, P0172 Fuel injection system function P0300-P0304 Misfire P0400, P1402 EGR function P0420 Three way catalyst function P0440, P1440 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK) P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK) P0505 IACV-AAC valve P0600 A/T communication line P0731-P0734, P0744 A/T function P1148 Closed loop control MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-123 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION Fail-safe Chart Fail-safe Chart =NCEC0040 The ECM enters fail-safe mode if any of the following malfunctions is detected due to the open or short circuit. When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MIL illuminates. DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode P0100 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. P0115 Engine coolant temperature Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning sensor circuit ignition switch “ON” or “START”. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Condition Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or Start 80°C (176°F) Except as shown above P0120 Throttle position sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display) 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the engine speed. Therefore, acceleration will be poor. Condition Driving condition When engine is idling When accelerating P0403 Unable to access ECM Normal Poor acceleration EGR volume control valve circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,800 rpm due to the fuel cut. ECM ECM fail-safe activating condition The computing function of the ECM was judged to be malfunctioning. When the fail-safe system activates (i.e., if the ECM detects a malfunction condition in the CPU of ECM), the MIL on the instrument panel lights to warn the driver. However it is not possible to access ECM and DTC cannot be confirmed. Engine control with fail-safe When ECM fail-safe is operating, fuel injection, ignition timing, fuel pump operation and IACV-AAC valve operation are controlled under certain limitations. ECM fail-safe operation Engine speed will not rise more than 3,000 rpm Engine speed Fuel injection Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system Ignition timing Ignition timing is fixed at the preset valve Fuel pump relay is “ON” when engine is running and “OFF” when engine stalls Fuel pump IACV-AAC valve Replace ECM, if ECM fail-safe condition is confirmed. EC-124 Full open TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION Symptom Matrix Chart Symptom Matrix Chart NCEC0041 SYSTEM — ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM NCEC0041S01 GI Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 Positive crankcase ventilation system 3 3 4 4 4 Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 IACV-AAC valve circuit 1 1 2 3 3 Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 Main power supply and ground circuit Air conditioner circuit Fuel Air Ignition EGR AJ AK AL 2 2 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 1 2 FE CL AM HA 3 2 EC-583 2 EC-574 4 4 EC-33 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 EC-107 2 2 2 2 2 EC-566 2 3 3 3 EC-344 1 2 3 3 3 EC-334, EC-481 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 LC Reference page EC-51 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page) 4 EM 4 EGR volume control valve circuit EGR system AG AH BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) AF EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE AE EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AD OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AC SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT AB MA IDLING VIBRATION ENGINE STALL AA Warranty symptom code ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM 3 2 3 1 EC-48 EC-107 2 MT AT AX SU EC-423 3 2 EC-147 3 2 HA section BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-125 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d) SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION 3 3 3 3 EC-326 2 2 2 2 2 EC-154 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-196 1 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 EC-171, 190 Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-177 Incorrect throttle position sensor adjustment 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-107 Vehicle speed sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-419 3 EC-316 3 EC-443, 124 AB AC AD AE Camshaft position sensor circuit 2 2 3 3 Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 2 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) circuit Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 Knock sensor circuit 2 ECM 2 Start signal circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Reference page AM HA EC-579 PNP switch circuit Power steering oil pressure switch circuit 3 BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) IDLING VIBRATION AL AA Warranty symptom code EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING AK LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AJ SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AH HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT AG ENGINE STALL AF HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE SYMPTOM 3 3 2 Electrical load signal circuit 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page) EC-126 3 3 3 EC-559 3 3 EC-592 3 3 EC-602 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d) SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER NCEC0041S03 Fuel AG AH AJ AK AL BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) AF MA EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION AE EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE AD OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AC SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AB GI IDLING VIBRATION HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT AA ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING ENGINE STALL Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM EM Reference page FE CL AM HA Fuel tank FE section 5 Fuel piping 5 Vapor lock 5 5 5 5 MT 5 5 AT Valve deposit Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low octane) Air 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 — AX Air duct SU Air cleaner Air leakage from air duct (Mass air flow sensor — throttle body) Throttle body, Throttle wire 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 BR 5 5 FE section ST Air leakage from intake manifold/ Collector/Gasket Cranking LC — RS Battery 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Alternator circuit EL section BT Starter circuit 3 1 Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM section PNP switch 4 AT section 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page) HA SC EL IDX EC-127 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d) 5 5 5 5 5 AG AH AJ AK AL BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) AF EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION AE EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION AD OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE AC SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AB IDLING VIBRATION SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AA ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT Engine ENGINE STALL Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM Reference page AM HA Cylinder head 5 5 5 Cylinder head gasket 4 3 Cylinder block Piston 4 EM section Piston ring 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Connecting rod Bearing Crankshaft Valve mechanism Timing chain Camshaft EM section Intake valve 3 Exhaust valve Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ Gasket 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 FE section 5 MA, EM and LC sections Three way catalyst Lubrication Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap Thermostat 5 LC section Water pump Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 Cooling fan 5 5 4 5 Coolant level (low)/ Contaminated coolant 5 EC-449 MA section 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. EC-128 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0042 Remarks: I Specification data are reference values. I Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector. * Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations. (i.e., Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING. Specification data might be displayed even when ignition timing is not adjusted to specification. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the input signals from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.) I If the real-time diagnosis results are NG, and the on board diagnostic system results are OK, when diagnosing the mass air flow sensor, first check to see if the fuel pump control circuit is normal. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION ENG SPEED I Tachometer: Connect I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II value. Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: “N” No-load Idle 1.3 - 1.7V MAS A/F SE-B1 I I I I 2,500 rpm 1.8 - 2.4V I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: “N” No-load Idle 1.0 - 1.6 msec 2,000 rpm 0.7 - 1.3 msec Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 53 - 155% B/FUEL SCHDL A/F ALPHA-B1 I Engine: After warming up COOLAN TEMP/S I Engine: After warming up HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) EM LC Almost the same speed as the CONSULT-II value. 0 - 0.3V +, 0.6 - 1.0V I Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN +, RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. I Engine: After warming up Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly 0 - 0.3V +, 0.6 - 1.0V FE CL MT AT AX SU BR LEAN +, RICH VHCL SPEED SE I Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CONSULT-II value Almost the same speed as the CONSULT-II value BATTERY VOLT I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Throttle valve: fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V I Engine: After warming up I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V THRTL POS SEN MA More than 70°C (158°F) HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B1) GI ST RS BT EGR TEMP SEN I Engine: After warming up Less than 4.5V EVAP SYS PRES I Ignition switch: ON Approx. 3.4V ABSOL PRES/SE I Ignition switch: ON Approx. 4.4V START SIGNAL I Ignition switch: ON , START , ON OFF , ON , OFF CLSD THL/P SW CLSD THL POS I Engine: After warming up I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Throttle valve: Idle position ON Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine A/C switch “OFF” OFF AIR COND SIG A/C switch “ON” (Compressor operates) ON EC-129 HA SC EL IDX TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d) MONITOR ITEM P/N POSI SW PW/ST SIGNAL LOAD SIGNAL CONDITION I Ignition switch: ON I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine I Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Shift lever “P” or “N” ON Except above OFF Steering wheel in neutral position (forward direction) OFF The steering wheel is turned ON Rear window defogger switch “ON” and/or lighting switch “2ND” ON Rear window defogger switch and lighting switch “OFF” OFF IGNITION SW I Ignition switch: ON , OFF Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: “N” No-load Idle 2.4 - 3.2 msec INJ PULSE-B1 I I I I 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.8 msec I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: “N” No-load Idle 15°±2° BTDC 2,000 rpm More than 25° BTDC I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: “N” No-load Idle 20.0 - 35.5% 2,500 rpm 17.0 - 30.0% I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Throttle valve: fully closed 0.0% I Engine: After warming up I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Throttle valve: fully opened Approx. 88.0% IGN TIMING CAL/LD VALUE ABSOL TH·P/S MASS AIRFLOW IACV-AAC/V PURG VOL C/V EGR VOL CON/V ON , OFF I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: N No-load Idle 2.5 - 5.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 7.1 - 12.5 g·m/s I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: “N” No-load Idle 5 - 20 steps 2,000 rpm — I I I I Engine: After warming up Idle Air conditioner switch: “OFF” Shift lever: “N” 2,000 rpm No-load 0% I I I I Engine: After warming up Idle Air conditioner switch: “OFF” Engine speed: Revving from Shift lever: “N” idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly No-load 0 step — 10 - 55 step AIR COND RLY I Air conditioner switch: OFF , ON OFF , ON ON FUEL PUMP RLY I Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 5 seconds) I Engine running and cranking I When engine is stopped (stops in 1.0 seconds) I Except as shown above OFF EC-130 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d) MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION VC/V BYPASS/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF VENT CONT/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF COOLING FAN HO2S1 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B1) I After warming up engine, idle the engine. I Air conditioner switch: OFF Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature is between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C (219°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature is 105°C (221°F) or more HIGH GI MA EM LC I Engine speed: Below 3,200 rpm ON I Engine speed: Above 3,200 rpm OFF I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) I Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF FE I Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm [After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more] ON CL MT Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode AT NCEC0043 The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode. THRTL POS SEN, ABSOL TH·P/S, CLSD THL/P SW AX NCEC0043S01 Below is the data for “THRTL POS SEN”, “ABSOL TH·P/S” and “CLSD THL/P SW” when depressing the accelerator pedal with the ignition switch “ON”. The signal of “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH·P/S” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise after “CLSD THL/P SW” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”. SU BR ST RS BT SEF240Y HA ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL POS SEN, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1 NCEC0043S02 Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL POS SEN”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine to normal operating temperature. Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary. SC EL IDX EC-131 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d) SEF241Y EC-132 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d) GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX SEF242YA EC-133 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION ECM Terminals and Reference Value ECM Terminals and Reference Value PREPARATION 1. I 2. NCEC0044 NCEC0044S01 ECM is located behind the center console. For this inspection: Remove the front passenger center console panel. Remove ECM harness protector. SEF838X 3. Perform all voltage measurements with the connector connected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily. I Open harness securing clip to make testing easier. I Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. I Data is for comparison and may not be exact. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF367I ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUTNCEC0044S02 SEF970W ECM INSPECTION TABLE NCEC0044S03 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC-134 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d) TERMINAL NO. 2 3 4 WIRE COLOR PU/R R/Y OR ITEM Vacuum cut valve bypass valve Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) GI [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) MA [Engine is running] I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm. I After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more. 0 - 1.0V EM [Ignition switch “ON”] I Engine stopped [Engine is running] I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm. 0 - 1.0V [Engine is running] I Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm. BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) LC FE CL 6 7 15 16 BR L R G IACV-AAC valve 8 9 17 18 SB W/B R/W G/R EGR volume control valve [Engine is running] I Idle speed 0.1 - 14V AT 10 Y/B A/T signal No. 3 [Engine is running] I Idle speed 0 - 1.0V AX [Engine is running] I Cooling fan is not operating BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) SU [Engine is running] I Cooling fan (High) is operating 0 - 0.6V [Engine is running] I Cooling fan is not operating BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Cooling fan is operating 0 - 0.6V 12 13 LG L/Y [Engine is running] I Idle speed 0.1 - 14V MT Cooling fan relay (High) Cooling fan relay (Low) BR ST RS BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BT [Engine is running] I Idle speed 14 P EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve HA SEF994U BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) EL [Engine is running] I Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine). IDX SEF995U EC-135 SC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d) TERMINAL NO. 19 21 22 23 31 WIRE COLOR BR/W B/P OR/L L/W W/G ITEM A/T signal No. 5 CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I Idle speed Approximately 8V [Ignition switch “ON”] I For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON” [Engine is running] 0 - 1V [Ignition switch “ON”] I More than 5 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON” BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V [Engine is running] I Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Fuel pump relay Malfunction indicator lamp Air conditioner relay ECM relay (Self shutoff) [Engine is running] I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON” (Com- 0 - 0.6V pressor operates) [Engine is running] I A/C switch is “OFF” BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] [Ignition switch “OFF”] I For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch “OFF” 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch “OFF”] I 5 seconds passed after turning ignition switch “OFF” BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 8.2V [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed SEF928X 32 L Tachometer Approximately 8.2V [Engine is running] I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEF929X EC-136 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d) TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) GI Approximately 0.3V MA [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed EM SEF996V 35 W/B LC Ignition signal Approximately 0.5V [Engine is running] I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm FE SEF997V CL Approximately 13V MT [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed AT SEF998V 36 G AX Ignition check Approximately 13V SU [Engine is running] I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm BR SEF999V 40 41 42 43 Y B/Y G/OR B/R [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition Throttle position switch I Accelerator pedal fully released (Closed position) [Engine is running] I Accelerator pedal depressed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) RS Approximately 0V BT [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V [Ignition switch “START”] 9 - 14V [Ignition switch “ON”] I Gear position is “Neutral position” (M/T models) I Gear position is “P” or “N” (A/T models) Approximately 0V SC [Ignition switch “ON”] I Except the above gear position BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) EL [Ignition switch “OFF”] 0V [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Start signal PNP switch ST Ignition switch EC-137 HA IDX TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d) TERMINAL NO. 44 46 48 WIRE COLOR L/B SB B ITEM Air conditioner switch Power steering oil pressure switch ECM ground CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON” Approximately 0V [Engine is running] I A/C switch is “OFF” BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Steering wheel is being turned. Approximately 0V [Engine is running] I Steering wheel is not being turned. Approximately 5V [Engine is running] I Idle speed Engine ground [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE I Lighting switch “2ND” and/or rear window defogger (11 - 14V) switch “ON” 50 R Electrical load signal [Ignition switch “ON”] I Lighting switch and rear window defogger switch “OFF” 0V 54 Y/R A/T signal No. 1 [Engine is running] I Idle speed Approximately 0 - 1.0V 55 Y/G A/T signal No. 2 [Engine is running] I Idle speed Approximately 0 - 1.0V 56 G/Y A/T signal No. 4 [Engine is running] I Idle speed Approximately 0 - 1.0V 57 B ECM ground [Engine is running] I Idle speed Engine ground 58 B Sensor’s ground [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed 1.3 - 1.7V [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Engine speed is 2,500 rpm 1.8 - 2.4V 61 L Mass air flow sensor 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change) 62 W Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEF059V 63 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm 0 - Approximately 1.0V 64 R/Y Intake air temperature sensor [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with intake air temperature. EC-138 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d) TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) GI 3 - 5V (AC range) MA [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed 65 W EM SEF721W Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) LC 6 - 9V (AC range) [Engine is running] I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEF722W 0.1 - 0.4V FE CL [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed MT AT 66 75 L L SEF006W Camshaft position sensor (Reference signal) 0.1 - 0.4V AX [Engine is running] I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SU BR SEF007W 67 W/L Power supply for ECM (Back-up) [Ignition switch “OFF”] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ST 70 BR/Y Engine coolant temperature sensor [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with engine coolant temperature. RS Approximately 0.4V BT GY [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition Throttle position sensor I Accelerator pedal fully released signal output [Ignition switch “ON”] I Accelerator pedal fully depressed Approximately 4V HA [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed Less than 4.5V SC [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I EGR system is operating 0 - 1.5V [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed Approximately 0V 71 72 73 R/B G EGR temperature sensor Mass air flow sensor ground EC-139 EL IDX TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d) TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition 0.36 - 3.88V I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON” (Compressor operates) 74 R/L Refrigerant pressure sensor 81 W Knock sensor [Engine is running] I Idle speed Approximately 2.5V 82 LG/R Fuel tank temperature sensor [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with fuel tank temperature. 83 G/R Fuel level sensor [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with fuel level. 84 W EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 3.4V Approximately 2.6V [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed 85 B/W SEF004W Camshaft position sensor (Position signal) Approximately 2.5V [Engine is running] I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEF005W 0 - Approximately 4.2V 86 Y/G Vehicle speed sensor [Engine is running] I Lift up the vehicle I In 2nd gear position I Vehicle speed is 40 km/h (25 MPH) SEF003W 90 B Fuel level sensor ground [Engine is running] I Idle speed Approximately 0V 91 PU A/T check signal [Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - Approximately 5V Y [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition Throttle position sensor I Accelerator pedal fully released 92 [Ignition switch “ON”] I Accelerator pedal fully depressed EC-140 0.15 - 0.85V 3.5 - 4.7V TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d) TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) MA [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed 101 103 105 107 R/B Y/B G/B L/B Injector Injector Injector Injector No. No. No. No. GI EM LC 1 2 3 4 SEF011W BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) FE [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm CL SEF012W 102 PU/W EVAP canister vent control valve [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 106 108 B B ECM ground [Engine is running] I Idle speed Engine ground 110 112 W W Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 111 P/L Sensor’s power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V DATA link connector [Ignition switch “ON”] I CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected. Approximately 8V 115 L/B MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-141 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE Description Description NCEC0666 The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or more malfunctions. The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the MIL. The SP value will be displayed for the following three items: I B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correction) I A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle) I MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) Testing Condition NCEC0667 I Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles) I Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi) I Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) I Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F) I Transmission: Warmed-up*1 I Electrical load: Not applied*2 I Engine speed: Idle *1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates less than 0.9V. For M/T models, drive vehicle for 5 minutes after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature. *2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Cooling fans are not operating. Steering wheel is straight ahead. Inspection Procedure SEF601Z NCEC0668 NOTE: Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display. 1. Perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-107. 2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met. 3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. 5. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-143. EC-142 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure NCEC0669 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX SEF613ZA EC-143 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) SEF768Z EC-144 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX SEF615Z EC-145 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Description Description NCEC0045 Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the problem resolves itself (the part or circuit function returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer’s complaint often do not recur on DTC (1st trip) visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the specific problem area. COMMON I/I REPORT SITUATIONS NCEC0045S01 STEP in Work Flow Situation II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or “1t”. III The symptom described by the customer does not recur. IV (1st trip) DTC data does not appear during the DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. VI The TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS for PXXXX does not indicate the problem area. Diagnostic Procedure 1 INSPECTION START Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED INFORMATION”, EC-79. © 2 GO TO 2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection. Refer to GI-30, “GROUND INSPECTION”. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © Repair or replace. 3 SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Refer to GI-25, “Incident Simulation Tests”. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair or replace. 4 CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS Refer to GI-22, “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”. OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © Repair or replace connector. EC-146 NCEC0046 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit WIRING DIAGRAM NCEC0047 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC696 EC-147 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d) ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NCEC0048 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 31 43 WIRE COLOR W/G B/R ITEM ECM relay (Self shut-off) CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] [Ignition switch “OFF”] I For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch “OFF” 0 - 1V [Ignition switch “OFF”] I 5 seconds passed after turning ignition switch “OFF” BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch “OFF”] 0V [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Ignition switch 48 B ECM ground [Engine is running] I Idle speed Engine ground 57 B ECM ground [Engine is running] I Idle speed Engine ground 67 W/L Power supply for ECM (Back-up) [Ignition switch “OFF”] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 106 B ECM ground [Engine is running] I Idle speed Engine ground 108 B ECM ground [Engine is running] I Idle speed Engine ground 110 112 W W Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 INSPECTION START Start engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes © GO TO 8. No © GO TO 2. EC-148 NCEC0049 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d) 2 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 43 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. GI MA EM LC SEF291X OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © GO TO 3. FE CL 3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M62, F24 I Harness for open or short between ECM and 10A fuse © 4 Repair harness or connectors. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 48, 57, 106, 108 and engine ground. Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. MT AT AX SU BR OK or NG ST OK © GO TO 5. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-149 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d) 5 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. Disconnect ECM relay. SEF185XA 2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 1, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF101Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © GO TO 6. 6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I 15A fuse and 7.5A fuse I Harness connectors E75, M6 I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery © 7 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 31 and ECM relay terminal 2. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © Go to “IGNITION SIGNAL”, EC-566. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-150 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d) 8 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. Stop engine. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 67 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. GI MA EM LC SEF293X OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © GO TO 9. FE CL 9 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART MT Check the following. I Harness connectors M62, F24 I Fuse block (J/B) connector M4, M5 I 7.5A fuse I Harness for open or short between ECM and 7.5A fuse © 10 AT Repair harness or connectors. AX CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV SU 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then “OFF”. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. BR ST RS BT SEF294X OK or NG OK © GO TO 16. NG (Battery voltage does not exist.) © GO TO 11. NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.) © GO TO 13. HA SC EL IDX EC-151 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d) 11 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V 1. Disconnect ECM relay. SEF185XA 2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF916Z OK or NG OK © GO TO 13. NG © GO TO 12. 12 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check harness for open or short between ECM relay and 7.5A fuse. © 13 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM RELAY AND ECM FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ECM relay terminal 3. Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 15. NG © GO TO 14. 14 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M62, F24 I Harness for open or short between ECM and ECM relay © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-152 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d) 15 CHECK ECM RELAY 1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2. 2. Check continuity between ECM relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. GI MA EM LC SEC202BC 12V (1 - 2) applied: Continuity exists. No voltage applied: No continuity FE OK or NG OK © GO TO 16. NG © Replace ECM relay. 16 CL CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 48, 57, 106, 108 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 17. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 17 MT AT AX SU BR CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © ST INSPECTION END RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-153 DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) Component Description Component Description SEF987W NCEC0050 The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0051 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION MAS A/F SE-B1 CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW SPECIFICATION I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: “OFF” Shift lever: “N” No-load Idle 1.3 - 1.7V 2,500 rpm 1.8 - 2.4V I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: “OFF” Shift lever: “N” No-load Idle 20.0 - 35.5% 2,500 rpm 17.0 - 30.0% I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: “OFF” Shift lever: “N” No-load Idle 2.5 - 5.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 7.1 - 12.5 g·m/s ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0052 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 61 73 WIRE COLOR L G ITEM Mass air flow sensor Mass air flow sensor ground CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed 1.3 - 1.7V [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Engine speed is 2,500 rpm 1.8 - 2.4V [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed Approximately 0V EC-154 DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0100 Malfunction is detected when ... A) C) B) D) E) NCEC0053 GI Check Items (Possible Cause) An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent I Harness or connectors to ECM when engine is not running. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Mass air flow sensor A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under light load driving condition. MA EM I Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Intake air leaks A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under I Mass air flow sensor heavy load driving condition. An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM* when engine is running. LC A voltage from the sensor exists constantly approx. 1.0V when engine is running. *: When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items FE Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. Mass air flow sensor circuit CL MT DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0054 Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B and E”. If there is no problem on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B and E”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”. If there is no problem on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION D”. CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NCEC0054S01 With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Wait at least 6 seconds. 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-159. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. SEF058Y EC-155 SC EL IDX DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND E SEF058Y PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C SEF174Y NCEC0054S02 With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most. 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-159. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is confirmed after more than 5 seconds, there may be malfunction C. NCEC0054S03 NOTE: If engine will not start or stops soon wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch “ON”) instead of running engine at idle speed. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4) Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. 5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-159. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-156 DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION D 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) NCEC0054S04 With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. If engine cannot be started, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-159. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed increases. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-159. If OK, go to following step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. More than 2,000 rpm THRTL POS SEN More than 3V Selector lever Suitable position Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 8) MA EM LC FE ENG SPEED SEF243Y GI CL If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-159. MT AT AX SU BR SEF175Y Overall Function Check NCEC0055 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION D SEF534P 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) ST RS NCEC0055S01 With GST Turn ignition switch “ON”. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MODE 1” with GST. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with “MODE 1”. Check for linear mass air flow rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-159. BT HA SC EL IDX EC-157 DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0056 TEC697 EC-158 DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0057 INSPECTION START GI Which malfunction (A, B, C or D) is duplicated? MA MTBL0373 EM Type I or Type II Type I © GO TO 3. Type II © GO TO 2. 2 LC CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check the followings for connection. I Air duct I Vacuum hoses I Intake air passage between air duct to collector FE CL OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © Reconnect the parts. 3 MT AT RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. AX SU BR ST SEF839X © GO TO 4. RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-159 DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. SEF840X 2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 3. Check voltage between MAFS terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF297X OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M62, F24 I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor I Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM © 6 Repair harness or connectors. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between MAFS terminal 3 and ECM terminal 73. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-160 DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 7 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Check harness continuity between MAFS terminal 1 and ECM terminal 61. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. GI MA OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8 EM LC CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-162. OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © Replace mass air flow sensor. 9 FE CL CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect joint connector-1. 3. Check the following. I Continuity between joint connector-1 terminal 1 and ground I Joint connector-1 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. 5. Then reconnect joint connector-1. MT AT AX OK or NG SU OK © GO TO 10. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. BR 10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © ST INSPECTION END RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-161 DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) Component Inspection Component Inspection =NCEC0058 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Conditions Ignition switch “ON” (Engine stopped.) SEF993W NCEC0058S01 Turn ignition switch “ON”. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Voltage V Less than 1.0 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.3 - 1.7 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.8 - 2.4 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.3 - 1.7 to Approx. 4.0 *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed. 4. 5. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again. Repeat above check. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film for damage or dust. EC-162 DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description Component Description NCEC0059 The absolute pressure sensor is built into the ECM. The sensor detects ambient barometric pressure and sends the voltage signal to the micro computer. As the pressure increases, the voltage rises. GI MA EM LC On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0105 Malfunction is detected when ... An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is sent to the micro computer. NCEC0060 Check Items (Possible Cause) I ECM FE CL MT DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF058Y NCEC0061 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Wait at least 6 seconds. 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-164. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-163 DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0670 INSPECTION START With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. See EC-163. 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0105 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. With GST Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select MODE 4 with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. See EC-163. 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0105 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. Yes or No Yes © GO TO 2. No © INSPECTION END 2 REPLACE ECM 1. Replace ECM. 2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-81. 3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-65, Is the result CMPLT or INCMP? CMPLT or INCMP CMPLT © INSPECTION END INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”. EC-164 DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Component Description Component Description NCEC0066 The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct housing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. GI MA EM LC SEF206T Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 80 (176) 1.23 0.27 - 0.38 FE *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 64 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. CL MT AT AX SU BR On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0110 Malfunction is detected when ... A) B) NCEC0067 ST Check Items (Possible Cause) RS An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor I Harness or connectors is sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Intake air temperature sensor Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant temperature sensor. BT HA DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0068 Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC-165 SC EL IDX DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NCEC0068S01 With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Wait at least 5 seconds. 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-168. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. SEF058Y PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B SEF176Y NCEC0068S02 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. TESTING CONDITION: This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. With CONSULT-II 1) Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F). a) Turn ignition switch “ON”. b) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. c) Check the engine coolant temperature. d) If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F), turn ignition switch “OFF” and cool down engine. I Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F). 2) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 4) Start engine. 5) Hold vehicle speed more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 105 consecutive seconds. 6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-168. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-166 DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0069 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC699 EC-167 DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0070 CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect intake air temperature sensor harness connector. SEF842X 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between intake air temperature sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF301X OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E75, M6 I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor © Repair harness or connectors. EC-168 DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check harness continuity between terminal 2 and engine ground. GI MA EM LC SEF204W Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. 4 CL DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E75, M6 I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor I Harness for open or short between intake air temperature sensor and TCM (Transmission control module) © 5 FE Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR MT AT AX SU Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-170. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Replace intake air temperature sensor. 6 BR ST CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © RS INSPECTION END BT HA SC EL IDX EC-169 DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Component Inspection Component Inspection =NCEC0071 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR NCEC0071S01 Check resistance as shown in the figure. SEF205W Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38 If NG, replace intake air temperature sensor. SEF012P EC-170 DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT) Component Description Component Description NCEC0072 The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. GI MA EM LC SEF594K SEF012P Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ −10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 FE *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 70 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. CL MT AT AX SU BR CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ST CONDITION RS NCEC0073 MONITOR ITEM COOLAN TEMP/S SPECIFICATION I Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F) On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0115 Malfunction is detected when ... I An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.* Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Engine coolant temperature sensor BT NCEC0074 HA SC *: When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. EL IDX EC-171 DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT) On Board Diagnosis Logic (Cont’d) Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch “ON” or “START”. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display) Condition Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or Start 80°C (176°F) 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) Except as shown above When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while the engine is running. DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF058Y NCEC0075 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Wait at least 5 seconds. 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-174. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-172 DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0076 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC700 EC-173 DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0077 CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS) harness connector. SEF843X 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between ECTS terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF585X OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E123, F6 I Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor © Repair harness or connectors. EC-174 DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check harness continuity between ECTS terminal 2 and engine ground. GI MA EM LC SEF207W Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. 4 FE CL DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E123, F6 I Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor I Harness for open or short between engine coolant temperature sensor and TCM (Transmission control module) © MT AT Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. AX 5 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SU Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-176. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. BR ST 6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © RS INSPECTION END BT HA SC EL IDX EC-175 DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT) Component Inspection Component Inspection NCEC0078 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 SEF152P If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P EC-176 NCEC0078S01 DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Component Description Component Description NCEC0079 NOTE: If DTC P0120 is displayed with DTC P0510, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0510, EC-432. The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the “Wide open and closed throttle position switch”, which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SEF208W SU CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0080 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine THRTL POS SEN ABSOL TH·P/S Throttle valve: fully closed ST 0.15 - 0.85V RS I Engine: After warming up I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Throttle valve: fully opened I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Throttle valve: fully closed I Engine: After warming up I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) SPECIFICATION BR 3.5 - 4.7V BT 0.0% HA Throttle valve: fully opened Approx. 88.0% SC EL IDX EC-177 DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ECM Terminals and Reference Value ECM Terminals and Reference Value =NCEC0081 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 92 WIRE COLOR Y ITEM CONDITION Throttle position sensor DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch “ON”] I Warm-up condition I Accelerator pedal fully released 0.15 - 0.85V [Ignition switch “ON”] I Accelerator pedal fully depressed 3.5 - 4.7V 111 P/L Sensors’ power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V 58 B Sensors’ ground [Engine is running] I Idle speed Approximately 0V On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0120 Malfunction is detected when ... NCEC0082 Check Items (Possible Cause) A) An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor I Harness or connectors is sent to ECM.* (The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Throttle position sensor B) A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under light load driving condition. I Harness or connectors (The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Throttle position sensor I Fuel injector I Camshaft position sensor I Mass air flow sensor C) A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under heavy load driving condition. I Harness or connectors (The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Intake air leaks I Throttle position sensor *: When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the engine speed. Therefore, acceleration will be poor. Throttle position sensor circuit Condition Driving condition When engine is idling Normal When accelerating Poor acceleration EC-178 DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0083 Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”. If there is no problem on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A GI MA EM LC NCEC0083S01 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. TESTING CONDITION: I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. I This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. FE CL MT With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. 1) SEF065Y VHCL SPEED SE More than 4 km/h (2 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position except “P” or “N” position 3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-184. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B NCEC0083S02 With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. If idle speed is over 1,000 rpm, maintain the following conditions for at least 10 seconds to keep engine speed below 1,000 rpm. SEF058Y EC-179 SC EL IDX DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) A/T model Selector lever Suitable position except “P” or “N” position Brake pedal Depressed Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position except “N” (Higher gear position such as 3rd or 4th is better to keep low engine rpm.) Accelerator pedal Released Vehicle speed As slow as possible M/T model 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-184. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C SEF177Y NCEC0083S03 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 3) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4) Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 5) Select “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH·P/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 6) Press RECORD on CONSULT-II SCREEN at the same time accelerator pedal is depressed. 7) Print out the recorded graph and check the following: I The voltage rise is linear in response to accelerator pedal depression. I The voltage when accelerator pedal is fully depressed is approximately 4V. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-184. If OK, go to following step. EC-180 DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) GI MA EM LC FE SEF174Z CL MT 8) 9) SEF178Y Select “AUTO TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm MAS A/F SE-B1 More than 3V COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) Selector lever Suitable position Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 10) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-184. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA With GST 1) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. Gear position Suitable position Engine speed More than 2,000 rpm Engine coolant temperature More than 70°C (158°F) Voltage between ECM terminal More than 3V 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground SEF993W EC-181 SC EL IDX DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) 2) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-184. EC-182 DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0084 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC701 EC-183 DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0085 INSPECTION START Which malfunction A, B or C is duplicated? MTBL0066 Type A, B or C Type A or B © GO TO 4. Type C © GO TO 2. 2 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-107. OK or NG OK 3 © GO TO 3. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check the followings for connection. I Air duct I Vacuum hoses I Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold collector OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Reconnect the parts. 4 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. SEF839X © GO TO 5. EC-184 DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector. GI MA EM LC SEF837X 2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 3. Check voltage between throttle position sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE CL MT AT SEF306X AX OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Repair harness or connectors. 6 SU CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT BR 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check harness continuity between throttle position sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. ST RS BT SEF210W Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © GO TO 7. HA SC EL IDX EC-185 DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle position sensor I Harness for open or short between throttle position sensor and TCM (Transmission control module) © 8 Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 92 and throttle position sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-188. OK or NG OK (Type B in step1) © GO TO 10. OK (Type A or C in step1) © GO TO 13. NG © Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-107. 10 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-162. OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Replace mass air flow sensor. 11 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-333. OK or NG OK © GO TO 12. NG © Replace camshaft position sensor. EC-186 DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 12 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR 1. Disconnect injector harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure. GI MA EM LC SEF964XA OK or NG OK © GO TO 13. NG © Replace fuel injector. FE CL 13 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect joint connector-1. 3. Check the following. I Continuity between joint connector-1 terminal 1 and ground Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Joint connector-1 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. 5. Then reconnect joint connector. MT AT AX SU OK or NG OK © GO TO 14. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. BR ST 14 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-187 DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Component Inspection Component Inspection NCEC0086 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SEF793W NCEC0086S01 With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Stop engine (ignition switch OFF). 3) Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener. 4) Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener. 5) Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, 11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of the throttle opener. 6) Turn ignition switch ON. 7) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 8) Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditions. NOTE: Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle. Throttle valve conditions Completely closed Voltage V 0.15 - 0.85 (a) SEF179Y Partially open Completely open 9) Between (a) and (b) 3.5 - 4.7 (b) If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-179. If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch in “Basic Inspection”, replace throttle position sensor. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF). Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener. 5) Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, 11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of the throttle opener. 6) Turn ignition switch ON. 7) Check voltage between ECM terminal 92 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground under the following conditions. NOTE: Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle. 1) 2) 3) 4) SEF793W Throttle valve conditions Completely closed Partially open Completely open SEF941X EC-188 Voltage V 0.15 - 0.85 (a) Between (a) and (b) 3.5 - 4.7 (b) DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Component Inspection (Cont’d) 8) If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-179. If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch in “Basic Inspection”, replace throttle position sensor. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-189 DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Component Description Component Description NCEC0087 NOTE: If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0115, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0115, EC-171. The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. SEF594K SEF012P Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ −10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 70 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0088 MONITOR ITEM COOLAN TEMP/S CONDITION I Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION More than 70°C (158°F) On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0125 Malfunction is detected when ... I Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not practical, even when some time has passed after starting the engine. I Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for closed loop fuel control. EC-190 Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors (High resistance in the circuit) I Engine coolant temperature sensor I Thermostat NCEC0089 DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF174Y =NCEC0090 CAUTION: Be careful not to overheat engine. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 15°C (59°F). If it is above 15°C (59°F), the test result will be OK. If it is below 15°C (59°F), go to following step. 4) Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 15°C (59°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will be OK. 5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-193. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-191 DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0091 TEC700 EC-192 DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0092 CHECK POWER SUPPLY GI 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. MA EM LC SEF843X 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between ECTS terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE CL MT AT AX SEF303X OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 SU BR DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E123, F6 I Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor © Repair harness or connectors. ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-193 DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check harness continuity between ECTS terminal 2 and engine ground. SEF207W Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. 4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E123, F6 I Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor I Harness for open or short between engine coolant temperature sensor and TCM (Transmission control module) © 5 Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-195. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. 6 CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION When the engine is cooled [lower than 82°C (180°F)], condition grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant does not flow. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to LC-12, “Thermostat”. 7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-194 DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Component Inspection Component Inspection NCEC0093 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.0 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 NCEC0093S01 GI MA EM LC SEF152P If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. FE CL MT SEF012P AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-195 DTC P0130 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT) Component Description Component Description NCEC0094 The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. SEF463R SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0095 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V HO2S1 (B1) I Engine: After warming up HO2S1 MNTR (B1) Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN +, RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0096 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - Approximately 1.0V 62 W Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) [Engine is running] I After warming up to normal operating temperature and engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEF059V EC-196 DTC P0130 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT) On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0097 Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately 0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks that this time is not inordinately long. GI MA EM LC SEF237U DTC No. P0130 Malfunction is detected when ... I The voltage from the sensor is constantly approx. 0.3V. Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) FE CL MT DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF643Y SEF644Y NCEC0098 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Select “HO2S1 (B1) P0130” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Touch “START”. 4) Let it idle for at least 3.5 minutes. NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,200 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 4. 5) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 10 to 60 seconds.) ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,200 rpm Vehicle speed More than 65 km/h (40 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 2.4 - 11.0 msec Selector lever Suitable position 6) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG SEF645Y EC-197 AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX DTC P0130 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-200. During this test, P1148 may be displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Overall Function Check SEF011X NCEC0099 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 62 [Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal] and engine ground. 3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. I The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V. 4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-200. EC-198 DTC P0130 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0100 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC778 EC-199 DTC P0130 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0101 INSPECTION START 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. SEF839X 3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector. SEF917Z © 2 GO TO 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and HO2S1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 (or HO2S1 terminal 2) and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-202. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). EC-200 DTC P0130 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect joint connector-1. 3. Check the following. I Continuity between joint connector-1 terminal 2 and ground I Joint connector-1 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. 5. Then reconnect joint connector. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT GI MA EM LC FE Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-201 DTC P0130 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT) Component Inspection Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SEF646Y SEF217YA =NCEC0102 NCEC0102S01 With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”. 3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. 4) Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. 5) Check the following. I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below: R = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, “RICH” L = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, “LEAN” I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. SEF648Y 1) 2) 3) I SEF011X Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 62 [Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than five times within 10 seconds. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V EC-202 DTC P0130 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT) Component Inspection (Cont’d) I The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. I The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time. I The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-203 DTC P0131 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT MONITORING) Component Description Component Description NCEC0103 The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. SEF463R SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0104 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V HO2S1 (B1) I Engine: After warming up HO2S1 MNTR (B1) Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN +, RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0105 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - Approximately 1.0V 62 W Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) [Engine is running] I After warming up to normal operating temperature and engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEF059V EC-204 DTC P0131 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT MONITORING) On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0106 To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is sufficiently high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected. GI MA EM LC SEF300U DTC No. P0131 Malfunction is detected when ... I The maximum and minimum voltages from the sensor are not reached to the specified voltages. Check Items (Possible Cause) I I I I I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) Fuel pressure Injectors Intake air leaks FE CL MT DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF649Y SEF650Y SEF651Y NCEC0107 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds. 3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0131” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 4) Touch “START”. 5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3.5 minutes. NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,200 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5. 6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 50 seconds or more.) ENG SPEED 1,900 - 3,100 rpm (A/T) 2,000 - 3,100 rpm (M/T) Vehicle speed Less than 120 km/h (75 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 4.0 - 12.0 msec (A/T) 3.5 - 12.0 msec (M/T) Selector lever Suitable position EC-205 AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX DTC P0131 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT MONITORING) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) 7) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-206. Overall Function Check SEF011X Diagnostic Procedure 1 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) © NCEC0108 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 62 [Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal] and engine ground. 3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. I The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. I The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time. 4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-206. GO TO 2. EC-206 NCEC0109 DTC P0131 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. GI MA EM LC SEF215Z 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. FE CL MT AT AX SU SEF840X 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed. 6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-79. 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-272. No © GO TO 3. 3 BR ST RS BT HA CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) SC Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-236. OK or NG EL OK © GO TO 4. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). IDX EC-207 DTC P0131 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-208. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). 5 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect joint connector-1. 3. For circuit, refer to “DTC P0130 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)”, EC-199. 4. Check the following. I Continuity between joint connector-1 terminal 2 and ground I Joint connector-1 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. 6. Then reconnect joint connector-1. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-199, for circuit. © INSPECTION END Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SEF646Y SEF217YA NCEC0110 NCEC0110S02 With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”. 3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. 4) Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. 5) Check the following. I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below: R = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, “RICH” L = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, “LEAN” I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. EC-208 DTC P0131 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT MONITORING) Component Inspection (Cont’d) I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. GI MA EM LC SEF648Y FE CL MT Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 62 [Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal] and engine ground. 3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. I The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than five times within 10 seconds. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V I The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. I The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time. I The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. 1) 2) SEF011X AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-209 DTC P0132 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT MONITORING) Component Description Component Description NCEC0111 The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. SEF463R SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0112 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V HO2S1 (B1) I Engine: After warming up HO2S1 MNTR (B1) Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN +, RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0113 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - Approximately 1.0V 62 W Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) [Engine is running] I After warming up to normal operating temperature and engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEF059V EC-210 DTC P0132 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT MONITORING) On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0114 To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is sufficiently high. The “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be detected. GI MA EM LC SEF299U DTC No. P0132 Malfunction is detected when ... I The maximum and minimum voltages from the sensor are beyond the specified voltages. Check Items (Possible Cause) I I I I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) Fuel pressure Injectors FE CL MT DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF653Y SEF654Y SEF655Y NCEC0115 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds. 3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0132” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 4) Touch “START”. 5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3.5 minutes. NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,200 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5. 6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 50 seconds or more.) ENG SPEED 1,900 - 3,100 rpm (A/T) 2,000 - 3,100 rpm (M/T) Vehicle speed Less than 120 km/h (75 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 4.0 - 12.0 msec (A/T) 3.5 - 12.0 msec (M/T) Selector lever Suitable position EC-211 AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX DTC P0132 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT MONITORING) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) 7) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-213. Overall Function Check SEF011X NCEC0116 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 62 [Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal] and engine ground. 3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. I The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time. I The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time. 4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-213. EC-212 DTC P0132 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 =NCEC0117 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) GI 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) © 2 MA EM GO TO 2. LC CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. FE CL MT AT SEF215Z 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? AX Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. SU BR ST RS BT SEF840X 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed. 6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-79. 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? HA SC EL Yes or No Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-279. No © GO TO 3. EC-213 IDX DTC P0132 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector. 3. Check harness connector for water. Water should not exit. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair or replace harness connector. 4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-236. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). 5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-215. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). 6 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect joint connector-1. 3. For circuit, refer to “DTC P0130 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)”, EC-199. 4. Check the following. I Continuity between joint connector-1 terminal 2 and ground I Joint connector-1 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. 6. Then reconnect joint connector-1. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-199, for circuit. © INSPECTION END EC-214 DTC P0132 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT MONITORING) Component Inspection Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SEF646Y SEF217YA NCEC0118 NCEC0118S02 With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”. 3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. 4) Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. 5) Check the following. I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below: R = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, “RICH” L = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, “LEAN” I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST SEF648Y RS BT HA 1) 2) 3) I SEF011X Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 62 [Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times when 10 seconds. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V EC-215 SC EL IDX DTC P0132 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT MONITORING) Component Inspection (Cont’d) I The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. I The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time. I The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. EC-216 DTC P0133 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Component Description Component Description NCEC0119 The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. GI MA EM LC SEF463R FE CL MT SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode AT CONDITION AX NCEC0120 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B1) I Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN +, RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. ECM Terminals and Reference Value ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - Approximately 1.0V 62 W Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) BR NCEC0121 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. SU ST RS BT HA [Engine is running] I After warming up to normal operating temperature and engine speed is 2,000 rpm SC SEF059V EL IDX EC-217 DTC P0133 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE MONITORING) On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0122 To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front), this diagnosis measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time [heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) cycling time index] is inordinately long or not. SEF010V DTC No. P0133 Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause) I The response of the voltage signal from the sensor takes I Harness or connectors more than the specified time. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) I Fuel pressure I Injectors I Intake air leaks I Exhaust gas leaks I PCV I Mass air flow sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF656Y SEF657Y SEF658Y NCEC0123 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds. 3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0133” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 4) Touch “START”. 5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3.5 minutes. NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,200 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5. 6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 50 seconds.) ENG SPEED 1,900 - 3,100 rpm (A/T) 2,000 - 3,100 rpm (M/T) Vehicle speed More than 80 km/h (50 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 4.0 - 12.0 msec (A/T) 3.5 - 12.0 msec (M/T) Selector lever Suitable position EC-218 DTC P0133 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE MONITORING) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) 7) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-221. GI MA EM LC Overall Function Check SEF011X NCEC0124 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 62 [Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal] and engine ground. 3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. I The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than five times within 10 seconds. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-221. FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-219 DTC P0133 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0125 TEC778 EC-220 DTC P0133 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0126 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS GI 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. MA EM LC SEF839X © FE GO TO 2. CL 2 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) Loosen and retighten front heated oxygen sensor. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) MT AT © GO TO 3. AX 3 CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and run it at idle. 2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst. SU BR ST RS SEF099P BT OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair or replace. HA SC 4 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. EL OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Repair or replace. IDX EC-221 DTC P0133 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. SEF215Z 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. SEF840X 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed. 6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-79. 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0172. Refer to EC-272, 279. No © GO TO 6. EC-222 DTC P0133 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector and ECM harness connector. GI MA EM LC SEF917Z 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and HO2S1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 (or HO2S1 terminal 2) and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. FE CL MT AT 7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) AX Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-236. OK or NG SU OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). BR 8 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-224. ST OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). 9 RS BT CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-162. OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Replace mass air flow sensor. 10 HA SC EL CHECK PCV VALVE Refer to “Positive Crankcase Ventilation”, EC-49. OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Repair or replace PCV valve. EC-223 IDX DTC P0133 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 11 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect joint connector-1. 3. Check the following. I Continuity between joint connector-1 terminal 2 and ground Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Joint connector-1 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. 5. Then reconnect joint connector. OK or NG OK © GO TO 12. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”. 3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. 4) Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. 5) Check the following. I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” five times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below: R = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, “RICH” L = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, “LEAN” I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. 1) 2) SEF646Y SEF217YA NCEC0127 NCEC0127S02 EC-224 DTC P0133 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Component Inspection (Cont’d) GI MA EM SEF648Y Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 62 [Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal] and engine ground. 3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. I The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than five times within 10 seconds. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V I The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. I The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time. I The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. LC 1) 2) SEF011X FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-225 DTC P0134 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE) Component Description Component Description NCEC0128 The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. SEF463R SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0129 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V HO2S1 (B1) I Engine: After warming up HO2S1 MNTR (B1) Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN +, RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0130 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - Approximately 1.0V 62 W Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) [Engine is running] I After warming up to normal operating temperature and engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEF059V EC-226 DTC P0134 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE) On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0131 To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) output is not inordinately high. GI MA EM LC SEF301UA DTC No. P0134 Malfunction is detected when ... I An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) FE CL MT DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF174Y NCEC0132 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 3) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 5) Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. 6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-229. With GST 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 3) Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. 4) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 5) Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. 6) Select “MODE 3” with GST. 7) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-229. I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-227 DTC P0134 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0133 TEC778 EC-228 DTC P0134 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0134 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) GI Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) © 2 MA GO TO 2. EM CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT LC 1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector and ECM harness connector. FE CL MT SEF917Z 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and HO2S1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 (or HO2S1 terminal 2) and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR AX SU BR ST Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair or replace harness connector. 4 AT CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) RS BT HA Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-230. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). SC EL IDX EC-229 DTC P0134 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect joint connector-1. 3. Check the following. I Continuity between joint connector-1 terminal 2 and ground Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Joint connector-1 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. Then reconnect joint connector. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”. 3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. 4) Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. 5) Check the following. I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” five times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below: R = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, “RICH” L = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, “LEAN” I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. 1) 2) SEF646Y SEF217YA NCEC0135 NCEC0135S01 EC-230 DTC P0134 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE) Component Inspection (Cont’d) GI MA EM SEF648Y Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 62 [Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal] and engine ground. 3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. I The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than five times within 10 seconds. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V I The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. I The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time. I The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. LC 1) 2) SEF011X FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-231 DTC P0135 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) Description Description NCEC0136 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NCEC0136S01 Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor Engine speed ECM function Actuator Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) control Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) corresponding to the engine operating condition. OPERATION NCEC0136S02 Engine speed Front heated oxygen sensor heater Above 3,200 rpm OFF Below 3,200 rpm ON CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0137 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S1 HTR (B1) CONDITION SPECIFICATION I Engine speed: Below 3,200 rpm ON I Engine speed: Above 3,200 rpm OFF ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0138 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 4 WIRE COLOR OR ITEM Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm. Approximately 0V [Engine is running] I Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm. BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0135 Malfunction is detected when ... I The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) circuit is out of the normal range. [An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front).] EC-232 NCEC0139 Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors [The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) circuit is open or shorted.] I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) DTC P0135 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0140 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. GI MA EM LC 1) 2) 3) SEF058Y 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) I With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-235. With GST Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed. Select “MODE 3” with GST. If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-235. When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-233 DTC P0135 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0141 TEC779 EC-234 DTC P0135 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0142 CHECK POWER SUPPLY GI 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector. MA EM LC SEF917Z 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE CL MT AT AX SEF934X OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 BR DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M62, F24 I Fuse block (J/B) connector M2 I 10A fuse I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) and fuse © 3 SU Repair harness or connectors. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ST RS BT HA 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 3 and ECM terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. SC EL OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. IDX EC-235 DTC P0135 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-236. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). 5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) SEF935X NCEC0143 NCEC0143S01 Check resistance between terminals 3 and 1. Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω at 25°C (77°F) Check continuity between terminals 2 and 1, 3 and 2. Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. EC-236 DTC P0137 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Component Description Component Description SEF327R NCEC0144 The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not used for engine control operation. GI MA EM LC CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0145 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION HO2S2 (B1) I Engine: After warming up HO2S2 MNTR (B1) SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm FE 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V CL LEAN +, RICH ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0146 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 63 WIRE COLOR W ITEM CONDITION Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I After warming up to normal operating temperature 0 - Approximately 1.0V and engine speed is 2,000 rpm MT AT AX SU BR On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0147 The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently low during various driving conditions such as fuel-cut. ST RS BT HA SEF304U DTC No. P0137 Malfunction is detected when ... I The minimum voltage from the sensor does not reach the specified voltage. EC-237 Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) I Fuel pressure I Injectors SC EL IDX DTC P0137 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING) DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF545Z SEF546Z NCEC0148 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 3) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 5) Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). 6) Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0137” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 7) Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II. 8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If NG is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-240. If “CANNOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a) Stop engine and cool down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates less than 70°C (158°F). b) Turn ignition switch “ON”. c) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. d) Start engine. e) Return to step 6 again when the “COOLAN TEMP/S” reaches to 70°C (158°F). SEF547Z Overall Function Check SEF032X NCEC0149 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 2) Stop vehicle with engine running. 3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals 63 [Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) signal] and engine ground. 4) Check the voltage when revving engine up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not necessary. 5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with “OD” OFF (A/T). The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once during this procedure. 6) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-240. EC-238 DTC P0137 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0150 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC780 EC-239 DTC P0137 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0151 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. SEF839X © GO TO 2. EC-240 DTC P0137 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. GI MA EM LC SEF215Z 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. FE CL MT AT AX SU SEF840X 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed. 6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-79. 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-279. No © GO TO 3. BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-241 DTC P0137 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector and ECM harness connector. SEF918Z 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 (or HO2S2 terminal 1) and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-243. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). EC-242 DTC P0137 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect joint connector-1. 3. Check the following. I Continuity between joint connector-1 terminal 2 and ground Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Joint connector-1 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. 5. Then reconnect joint connector-1. GI MA EM LC OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 7 FE CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © CL INSPECTION END MT Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) NCEC0152 With CONSULT-II Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 2) Stop vehicle with engine running. 3) Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. 4) Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. 1) SEF662Y AT NCEC0152S01 AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX SEF244Y EC-243 DTC P0137 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Component Inspection (Cont’d) Without CONSULT-II Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 2) Stop vehicle with engine running. 3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals 63 [Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) signal] and engine ground. 4) Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once. If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 4, step 5 is not necessary. 5) Check the voltage when revving up to 6,000 rpm under no load. Or keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with “OD” OFF (A/T). The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. 1) SEF032X EC-244 DTC P0138 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Component Description Component Description SEF327R NCEC0153 The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not used for engine control operation. GI MA EM LC CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0154 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION HO2S2 (B1) I Engine: After warming up HO2S2 MNTR (B1) SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm FE 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V CL LEAN +, RICH ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0155 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 63 WIRE COLOR W ITEM CONDITION Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I After warming up to normal operating temperature 0 - Approximately 1.0V and engine speed is 2,000 rpm MT AT AX SU BR On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0156 The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during various driving conditions such as fuel-cut. ST RS BT HA SEF259VA DTC No. P0138 Malfunction is detected when ... I The maximum voltage from the sensor does not reach the specified voltage. EC-245 Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) I Fuel pressure I Injectors I Intake air leaks SC EL IDX DTC P0138 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING) DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF663Y SEF664Y NCEC0157 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 3) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 5) Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). 6) Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0138” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 7) Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II. 8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If NG is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-248. If “CANNOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a) Stop engine and cool down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates less than 70°C (158°F). b) Turn ignition switch “ON”. c) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. d) Start engine. e) Return to step 6 again when the “COOLAN TEMP/S” reaches to 70°C (158°F). SEF665Y Overall Function Check SEF032X NCEC0158 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 2) Stop vehicle with engine running. 3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals 63 [Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) signal] and engine ground. 4) Check the voltage when revving engine up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not necessary. 5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with “OD” OFF (A/T). The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this procedure. 6) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-248. EC-246 DTC P0138 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0159 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC780 EC-247 DTC P0138 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0160 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. SEF839X © GO TO 2. EC-248 DTC P0138 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. GI MA EM LC SEF215Z 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. FE CL MT AT AX SU SEF840X 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed. 6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-79. 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-272. No © GO TO 3. BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-249 DTC P0138 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector and ECM harness connector. SEF918Z 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 (or HO2S2 terminal 1) and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-251. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). EC-250 DTC P0138 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect joint connector-1. 3. Check the following. I Continuity between joint connector-1 terminal 2 and ground Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Joint connector-1 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. 5. Then reconnect joint connector-1. GI MA EM LC OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 7 FE CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © CL INSPECTION END MT Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) NCEC0161 With CONSULT-II Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.. 2) Stop vehicle with engine running. 3) Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. 4) Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. 1) SEF662Y AT NCEC0161S01 AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX SEF244Y EC-251 DTC P0138 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING) Component Inspection (Cont’d) Without CONSULT-II Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 2) Stop vehicle with engine running. 3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals 63 [Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) signal] and engine ground. 4) Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once. If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 4, step 5 is not necessary. 5) Check the voltage when revving up to 6,000 rpm under no load. Or keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with “OD” OFF (A/T). The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. 1) SEF032X EC-252 DTC P0139 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Component Description Component Description SEF327R NCEC0162 The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not used for engine control operation. GI MA EM LC CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0163 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION HO2S2 (B1) I Engine: After warming up HO2S2 MNTR (B1) SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm FE 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V CL LEAN +, RICH ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0164 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 63 WIRE COLOR W ITEM CONDITION Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I After warming up to normal operating temperature 0 - Approximately 1.0V and revving engine from idle to 2,000 rpm MT AT AX SU BR On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0165 The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor’s voltage is faster than specified during various driving conditions such as fuel-cut. ST RS BT HA SEF302U DTC No. P0139 Malfunction is detected when ... I It takes more than the specified time for the sensor to respond between rich and lean. EC-253 Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) I Fuel pressure I Injectors I Intake air leaks SC EL IDX DTC P0139 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (RESPONSE MONITORING) DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF666Y SEF667Y NCEC0166 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 3) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 5) Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). 6) Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 7) Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II. 8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If NG is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-256. If “CANNOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a) Stop engine and cool down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates less than 70°C (158°F). b) Turn ignition switch “ON”. c) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. d) Start engine. e) Return to step 6 again when the “COOLAN TEMP/S” reaches to 70°C (158°F). SEF668Y Overall Function Check SEF032X NCEC0167 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 2) Stop vehicle with engine running. 3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals 63 [Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) signal] and engine ground. 4) Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not necessary. 5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with “OD” OFF (A/T). The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. 6) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-256. EC-254 DTC P0139 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0168 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC780 EC-255 DTC P0139 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0169 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. SEF839X © GO TO 2. EC-256 DTC P0139 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. GI MA EM LC SEF215Z 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. FE CL MT AT AX SU SEF840X 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed. 6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-79. 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-279. No © GO TO 3. BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-257 DTC P0139 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector and ECM harness connector. SEF918Z 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 (or HO2S2 terminal 1) and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-259. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). EC-258 DTC P0139 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect joint connector-1. 3. Check the following. I Continuity between joint connector-1 terminal 2 and ground Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Joint connector-1 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. 5. Then reconnect joint connector-1. GI MA EM LC OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 7 FE CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © CL INSPECTION END MT Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) NCEC0170 With CONSULT-II Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 2) Stop vehicle with engine running. 3) Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. 4) Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. 1) SEF662Y AT NCEC0170S01 AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX SEF244Y EC-259 DTC P0139 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (RESPONSE MONITORING) Component Inspection (Cont’d) Without CONSULT-II Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 2) Stop vehicle with engine running. 3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals 63 [Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) signal] and engine ground. 4) Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once. If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 4, step 5 is not necessary. 5) Check the voltage when revving up to 6,000 rpm under no load. Or keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with “OD” OFF (A/T). The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. 1) SEF032X EC-260 DTC P0140 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE) Component Description Component Description SEF327R NCEC0171 The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not used for engine control operation. GI MA EM LC CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0172 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION HO2S2 (B1) I Engine: After warming up HO2S2 MNTR (B1) SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm FE 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V CL LEAN +, RICH ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0173 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 63 WIRE COLOR W ITEM CONDITION Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I After warming up to normal operating temperature 0 - Approximately 1.0V and revving engine from idle to 2,000 rpm MT AT AX SU BR On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0174 The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether or not the voltage is too high during various driving conditions such as fuelcut. ST RS BT HA SEF305UA DTC No. P0140 Malfunction is detected when ... I An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) SC EL IDX EC-261 DTC P0140 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE) DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF189Y ENG SPEED 1,400 - 3,400 rpm VHCL SPEED SE 64 - 120 km/h (40 - 75 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 0.5 - 3.9 msec COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) Selector lever Suitable position 6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-264. Overall Function Check SEF032X NCEC0175 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure ” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 3) Stop vehicle with engine running. 4) Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. NCEC0176 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. Without CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 2) Stop vehicle with engine running. 3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals 63 [Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) signal] and engine ground. 4) Check the voltage after revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be below 1.4V during this procedure. 5) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-264. EC-262 DTC P0140 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0177 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC780 EC-263 DTC P0140 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0178 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. SEF839X © 2 GO TO 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector and ECM harness connector. SEF918Z 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 (or HO2S2 terminal 1) and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-264 DTC P0140 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector for water. Water should not exist. GI OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Repair or replace harness connector. 5 MA EM CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) LC Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-265. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). FE 6 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect joint connector-1. 3. Check the following. I Continuity between joint connector-1 terminal 2 and ground Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Joint connector-1 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. 5. Then reconnect joint connector-1. CL MT AT AX OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 7 SU BR CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © ST INSPECTION END RS BT HA Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) 1) 2) 3) 4) SEF662Y NCEC0179 NCEC0179S01 With CONSULT-II Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. Stop vehicle with engine running. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. EC-265 SC EL IDX DTC P0140 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE) Component Inspection (Cont’d) “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. SEF244Y Without CONSULT-II Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 2) Stop vehicle with engine running. 3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals 63 [Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) signal] and engine ground. 4) Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once. If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 4, step 5 is not necessary. 5) Check the voltage when revving up to 6,000 rpm under no load. Or keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with “OD” OFF (A/T). The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once. CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. 1) SEF032X EC-266 DTC P0141 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) Description Description NCEC0180 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NCEC0180S01 Sensor ECM function Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor Actuator MA Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) control Engine speed GI Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) EM LC The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) corresponding to the engine speed. OPERATION NCEC0180S02 Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) Above 3,600 OFF Below 3,600 ON FE CL CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode MT NCEC0181 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 HTR (B1) CONDITION AT SPECIFICATION I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) I Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF I Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm [After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more] ON AX SU ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0182 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 3 WIRE COLOR R/Y ITEM Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm I After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch “ON”] I Engine stopped [Engine is running] I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) P0141 RS BT SC NCEC0183 Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause) I The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) circuit is out of the normal range. [An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear).] I Harness or connectors [The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) circuit is open or shorted.] I Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) EC-267 ST HA On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. BR EL IDX DTC P0141 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0184 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure ” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is in between 10.5V and 16V at idle. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 3) Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds. 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-270. With GST 1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 2) Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds. 3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 4) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 5) Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds. 6) Select “MODE 3” with GST. 7) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-270. When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. 1) SEF175Y EC-268 DTC P0141 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0185 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC781 EC-269 DTC P0141 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0186 CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector. SEF918Z 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground. SEF218W Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M62, F24 I Fuse block (J/B) connector M2 I 10A fuse I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) and fuse © 3 Repair harness or connectors. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ECM terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-270 DTC P0141 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-271. GI OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). 5 MA EM CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © LC INSPECTION END FE CL MT Component Inspection NCEC0187 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) Check the following. 1. Check resistance between terminals 2 and 3. Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω at 25°C (77°F) 2. Check continuity. Terminal No. AT NCEC0187S01 AX SU Continuity 1 and 2, 3, 4 No BR 4 and 1, 2, 3 If NG, replace the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). CAUTION: I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. ST RS BT HA SEF221W SC EL IDX EC-271 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (LEAN SIDE) On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0188 With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). Sensor Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) DTC No. P0171 ECM function Input Signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Malfunction is detected when ... I Fuel injection system does not operate properly. I The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Actuator Injectors Check Items (Possible Cause) I I I I I I I Intake air leaks Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Injectors Exhaust gas leaks Incorrect fuel pressure Lack of fuel Mass air flow sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF215Z NCEC0189 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-275. 7) If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 8) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-275. If engine does not start, visually check for exhaust and intake air leak. SEF058Y 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) With GST Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is detected. Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC P0100. SEF840X EC-272 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (LEAN SIDE) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) 7) Start engine again and run it for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. 8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-275. 9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-275. If engine does not start, visually check for exhaust and intake air leak. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-273 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (LEAN SIDE) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0190 TEC795 EC-274 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (LEAN SIDE) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0191 CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK GI 1. Start engine and run it at idle. 2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst. MA EM LC SEF099P FE OK or NG OK © GO TO 2. NG © Repair or replace. 2 CL MT CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. AT OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © Repair or replace. 3 AX SU CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector and ECM harness connector. BR ST RS BT SEF917Z 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and HO2S1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 (or HO2S1 terminal 2) and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. HA SC EL OK or NG IDX OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-275 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (LEAN SIDE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-50. 2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. At idling: When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected. 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi) When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected. 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi) OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-583.) I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-51.) I Fuel lines. Refer to MA-16, “Checking Fuel Lines”. I Fuel filter for clogging © 6 Repair or replace. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. at idling: 2.5 - 5.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm: 7.1 - 12.5 g·m/sec With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. at idling: 2.5 - 5.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm: 7.1 - 12.5 g·m/sec OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-154. EC-276 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (LEAN SIDE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 7 CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. GI MA EM LC SEF190Y 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. FE Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. CL MT AT AX MEC703B SU Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-574. 8 REMOVE INJECTOR 1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 3. Remove injector with fuel tube assembly. Refer to EC-51. Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. The injector harness connectors should remain connected. © BR ST RS BT HA GO TO 9. SC EL IDX EC-277 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (LEAN SIDE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 9 CHECK INJECTOR 1. Disconnect all ignition wires. 2. Place pans or saucers under each injector. 3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors. SEF595Q Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each cylinder. OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new one. 10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-278 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (RICH SIDE) On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0192 With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). Sensor Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) DTC No. P0172 ECM function Input Signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Malfunction is detected when ... I Fuel injection system does not operate properly. I The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control MA EM Actuator LC Injectors Check Items (Possible Cause) I I I I I GI FE Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Injectors Exhaust gas leaks Incorrect fuel pressure Mass air flow sensor CL MT DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF215Z NCEC0193 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure ” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-282. 7) If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 8) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-282. If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc. AT With GST Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is detected. Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC P0100. SC AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SEF058Y 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) SEF840X EC-279 EL IDX DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (RICH SIDE) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) 7) Start engine again and run it for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. 8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-282. 9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-282. If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc. EC-280 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (RICH SIDE) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0194 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC795 EC-281 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (RICH SIDE) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0195 CHECK FOR EXHAUST AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and run it at idle. 2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before the three way catalyst. SEF099P OK or NG OK © GO TO 2. NG © Repair or replace. 2 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector and ECM harness connector. SEF917Z 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and HO2S1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 (or HO2S1 terminal 2) and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-282 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (RICH SIDE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-50. 2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. At idling: When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected. Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi) When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected. Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi) OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. 4 MA EM LC DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART FE Check the following. I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-583.) I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-51.) © 5 GI CL Repair or replace. MT CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. at idling: 2.5 - 5.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm: 7.1 - 12.5 g·m/sec With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. at idling: 2.5 - 5.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm: 7.1 - 12.5 g·m/sec AT AX SU BR OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-154. ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-283 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (RICH SIDE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF190Y 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. MEC703B Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-575. 7 REMOVE INJECTOR 1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 3. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EC-51. Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. © 8 1. 2. 3. 4. GO TO 8. CHECK INJECTOR Disconnect all injector harness connectors. Disconnect all ignition wires. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip) © GO TO 9. NG (Drips) © Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one. EC-284 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (RICH SIDE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © GI INSPECTION END MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-285 DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Component Description Component Description NCEC0196 The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. SEF463TA Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 82 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0180 Malfunction is detected when ... I An excessively high or low voltage is sent to ECM. I Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor and intake air temperature sensor. Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Fuel tank temperature sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF174Y NCEC0197 NCEC0198 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Wait at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-289. EC-286 DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) 4) 5) 6) 7) If the result is OK, go to following step. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” signal. If the signal is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK. If the signal is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” signal is less than 60°C (140°F). Wait at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-289. GI MA EM LC With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-287 DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0199 TEC707 EC-288 DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0200 CHECK POWER SUPPLY GI 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit harness connector. MA EM LC SEF299WA 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE CL MT AT AX SEF936X OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 SU BR DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors B102, M74 I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor unit © ST RS Repair harness or connector. BT 3 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit terminal 1 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-289 HA SC EL IDX DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-290. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace fuel tank temperature sensor. 5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END Component Inspection NCEC0201 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR NCEC0201S01 Check resistance by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. SEF325Z Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 If NG, replace fuel tank temperature sensor. EC-290 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION System Description System Description NCEC0505 COOLING FAN CONTROL NCEC0505S01 Sensor Input Signal to ECM Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal Ignition switch Start signal Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure ECM function Cooling fan control GI Actuator MA EM Cooling fan relay(s) LC The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF]. OPERATION NCEC0505S02 FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT SEF932X HA CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode SC CONDITION EL NCEC0506 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM AIR COND SIG I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine SPECIFICATION Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates) ON EC-291 IDX DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d) MONITOR ITEM COOLING FAN CONDITION I After warming up engine, idle the engine. I Air conditioner switch: OFF SPECIFICATION Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature is between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C (219°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature is 105°C (221°F) or more HIGH ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0643 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 12 13 WIRE COLOR LG L/Y ITEM Cooling fan relay (High) Cooling fan relay (Low) CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I Cooling fan is not operating BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Cooling fan (High) is operating 0 - 0.6V [Engine is running] I Cooling fan is not operating BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Cooling fan is operating 0 - 0.6V On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0507 This diagnosis checks whether the engine coolant temperature is extraordinary high, even when the load is not heavy. When malfunction is detected, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will light up even in the first trip. Malfunction is detected when engine coolant temperature is excessively high under normal engine speed. Possible Cause I I I I I I I Harness or connectors (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted) Cooling fan Thermostat Improper ignition timing Engine coolant temperature sensor Blocked radiator Blocked front end (Improper fitting of nose mask) EC-292 NCEC0508 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Possible Cause (Cont’d) I Crushed vehicle frontal area (Vehicle frontal is collided but not repaired) I Blocked air passage by improper installation of front fog lamp or fog lamps. I Improper mixture ratio of coolant I Damaged bumper For more information, refer to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-308. CAUTION: When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to MA-14, “Changing Engine Coolant”. Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to MA-18, “Changing Engine Oil”. 1) Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12, “Antifreeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”. 2) After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT Overall Function Check NCEC0509 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the coolant overtemperature enrichment protection check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high-pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off. WITH CONSULT-II 1) I I SEF621W a) b) c) 2) 3) 4) NCEC0509S01 Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester) in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level and mixture ratio. If the coolant level in the reservoir and/or radiator is below the proper range, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-297. If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55%, replace the coolant in the following procedure MA-14, “Changing Engine Coolant”. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute like pouring coolant from a kettle. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12, “Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted. After checking or replacing coolant, go to step 3 below. Ask the customer if engine coolant has been added. If it has been added, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-297. After repair, go to the next step. Start engine and let it idle. Make sure that A/C switch is “OFF” and air conditioner is not EC-293 AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Overall Function Check (Cont’d) 5) a) b) 6) a) 7) a) b) c) 8) 9) operating. If NG, check air conditioner circuit. Refer to HA-23 or HA-140, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”. After repair, go to the next step. Perform “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 95°C (203°F) and make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-297. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 105°C (221°F) and make sure that cooling fan operates at high speed. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-297. After repair, go to the next step. Check for blocked coolant passage. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature, then grasp radiator upper hose and lower hose and make sure that coolant flows. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-297. After repair, go to the next step. Be extremely careful not to touch any moving or adjacent parts. Check for blocked radiator air passage. When market fog lamps have been installed, check for damaged fans and clogging in the condenser and radiator. Check the front end for clogging caused by insects or debris. Check for improper fitting of front-end cover, damaged radiator grille or bumper, damaged vehicle front. If NG, take appropriate action and then go to the next step. Check function of ECT sensor. Refer to step 7 of “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-297. If NG, replace ECT sensor and go to the next step. Check ignition timing. Refer to basic inspection, EC-107. Make sure that ignition timing is 15°±2° at idle. If NG, adjust ignition timing and then recheck. WITH GST 1) I I a) b) c) 2) 3) 4) NCEC0509S02 Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester) in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level and mixture ratio. If the coolant level in the reservoir and/or radiator is below the proper range, and go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-297. If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55%, replace the coolant in the following procedure MA-14, “Changing Engine Coolant”. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute like pouring coolant from a kettle. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12, “Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted. After checking or replacing coolant, go to step 3 below. Ask the customer if engine coolant has been added. If it has been added, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-297. After repair, go to the next step. Start engine and let it idle. Make sure that A/C switch is “OFF” and air conditioner is not operating. If NG, check air conditioner circuit. Refer to HA-23 or HA-140, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”. After repair, go to the next step. EC-294 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Overall Function Check (Cont’d) 5) 6) Turn ignition switch “OFF” Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 7) Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor. 8) Start engine and make sure that cooling fan operates. Be careful not to overheat engine. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-297. After repair, go to the next step. 9) Check for blocked coolant passage. a) Warm up engine to normal operating temperature, then grasp radiator upper hose and lower hose and make sure that coolant flows. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-297. After repair, go to the next step. Be extremely careful not to touch any moving or adjacent parts. 10) Check for blocked radiator air passage. a) When market fog lamps have been installed, check for damaged fans and clogging in the condenser and radiator. b) Check the front end for clogging caused by insects or debris. c) Check for improper fitting of front-end cover, damaged radiator grille or bumper, damaged vehicle front. If NG, take appropriate action and then go to the next step. 11) Check function of ECT sensor. Refer to step 6 of “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-297. If NG, replace ECT sensor and go to the next step. 12) Check ignition timing. Refer to basic inspection, EC-107. Make sure that ignition timing is 15°±2° at idle. If NG, adjust ignition timing and then recheck. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-295 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0510 TEC777 EC-296 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0511 INSPECTION START GI Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes © GO TO 2. No © GO TO 4. 2 MA EM CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION LC With CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3. FE CL MT SEF857X 2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. AT AX SU BR ST SEF784Z 4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-303.) RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-297 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF785Z 6. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than low speed. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-306.) EC-298 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION Without CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3. GI MA EM LC SEF857X 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and let it idle. Set temperature lever at full cold position. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”. Turn blower fan switch “ON”. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. FE CL MT AT AX SEC163BA SU OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-303.) BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-299 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than low speed. MEF613EA OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-306.) 6 CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops. Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi) CAUTION: Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage. SLC754A Pressure should not drop. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © GO TO 7. 7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following for leak. I Hose I Radiator I Water pump (Refer to LC-10, “Water Pump”.) © Repair or replace. EC-300 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 8 CHECK RADIATOR CAP Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief pressure. GI MA EM LC SLC755A Radiator cap relief pressure: 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi) FE OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © Replace radiator cap. 9 CL MT CHECK THERMOSTAT 1. Remove thermostat. 2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures. It should seat tightly. 3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift. AT AX SU BR ST SLC343 Valve opening temperature: 82°C (180°F) [standard] Valve lift: More than 8 mm/95°C (0.31 in/203°F) 4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to LC-12, “Thermostat”. RS BT OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Replace thermostat HA SC EL IDX EC-301 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 10 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor. 2. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. SEF304X OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. 11 CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES If the cause cannot be isolated, go to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-308. © INSPECTION END EC-302 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) PROCEDURE A 1 1. 2. 3. 4. =NCEC0511S01 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT GI Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 3, 7 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. MA EM LC FE SEF727W Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 MT AT DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I 10A fuse I 40A fusible links I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery © CL AX SU Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-303 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. SEF854X 3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1, cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E75, M6 I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-304 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1 Check continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions. GI MA EM LC SEF591X OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Replace cooling fan relay. 7 FE CL CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check operation. MT AT AX SU SEF937X OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace cooling fan motors. 8 BR ST RS CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END BT HA SC EL IDX EC-305 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) PROCEDURE B 1 1. 2. 3. 4. =NCEC0511S02 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF593X OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fuse I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fusible link © 3 Repair harness or connectors. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 7 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 7 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. EC-306 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E75, M6 I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and ECM © GI MA Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EM 6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3 Check continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions. LC FE CL SEF591X MT OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Replace cooling fan relays. 7 AT AX CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check operation. SU BR ST RS SEF937X OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace cooling fan motors. 8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT BT HA SC Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EL IDX EC-307 DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION Main 12 Causes of Overheating Main 12 Causes of Overheating Engine Step Inspection item OFF 1 I I I I 2 Equipment Standard NCEC0512 Reference page I Visual No blocking I Coolant mixture I Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-11, “RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS”. 3 I Coolant level I Visual Coolant up to MAX level in reservoir tank and radiator filler neck See MA-14, “Changing Engine Coolant”. 4 I Radiator cap I Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi) (Limit) See LC-9, “System Check”. ON*2 5 I Coolant leaks I Visual No leaks See LC-9, “System Check”. ON*2 6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and lower radiator hoses Both hoses should be hot See LC-12, “Thermostat” and LC-14, “Radiator”. ON*1 7 I Cooling fan I CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for DTC P0217 (EC-291). OFF 8 I Combustion gas leak I Color checker chemical tester 4 Gas analyzer Negative — ON*3 9 I Coolant temperature gauge I Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when driving — I Coolant overflow to reservoir tank I Visual No overflow during driving and idling See MA-14, “Changing Engine Coolant”. Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked radiator condenser radiator grille bumper — OFF*4 10 I Coolant return from I Visual reservoir tank to radiator Should be initial level in reservoir tank See MA-13, “ENGINE MAINTENANCE”. OFF 11 I Cylinder head 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping) See EM-36, “Inspection”. 12 I Cylinder block and pis- I Visual tons No scuffing on cylinder walls or piston See EM-59, “Inspection”. I Straight gauge feeler gauge *1: Turn the ignition switch ON. *2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. *3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes. *4: After 60 minutes of cool down time. For more information, refer to LC-15, “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS”. EC-308 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0202 When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate (vary). If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the CKP sensor to vary, ECM can detect a misfire. Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) ECM function Engine speed MA On board diagnosis of misfire The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. 1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) On the first rip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL will blink. When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor (OBD) signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again. 2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) For misfire conditions that will not cause damage to the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor (OBD) signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on-multiple cylinders. DTC No. Malfunction is detected when ... P0300 I Multiple cylinders misfire. P0301 I No. 1 cylinder misfires. P0302 I No. 2 cylinder misfires. P0303 I No. 3 cylinder misfires. P0304 I No. 4 cylinder misfires. I I I I I I I I I I I I Improper spark plug Insufficient compression Incorrect fuel pressure EGR volume control valve The injector circuit is open or shorted Injectors Intake air leak The ignition secondary circuit is open or shorted Lack of fuel Drive plate/Flywheel Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Incorrect distributor roter NCEC0203 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 4) Start engine again and drive at 1,500 to 3,000 rpm for at least 3 minutes. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. NOTE: Refer to the freeze frame data for the test driving conditions. 5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-310. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-309 EM LC FE CL MT Check Items (Possible Cause) DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF058Y GI AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and run it at idle speed. 2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. OK or NG OK © GO TO 2. NG © Discover air leak location and repair. 2 CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © Repair or replace it. 3 CHECK EGR FUNCTION Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN). Refer to EC-481. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair EGR system. EC-310 NCEC0204 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST With CONSULT-II 1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. GI MA EM LC SEF190Y 2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop? FE Without CONSULT-II When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop? CL MT AT AX SEF846X Yes or No Yes © GO TO 5. No © GO TO 8. 5 SU BR ST CHECK INJECTOR Does each injector make an operating sound at idle? RS BT HA SC MEC703B Yes or No Yes © GO TO 6. No © Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-574. EC-311 EL IDX DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT Refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-569. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. 7 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CHECK IGNITION SPARK Turn Ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect ignition wire from spark plug. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition wire. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine. Check for spark. SEF282G OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © GO TO 8. 8 CHECK IGNITION WIRES Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-315. OK or NG OK © Check distributor rotor head for incorrect parts. Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-566. NG © Replace. EC-312 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 9 CHECK SPARK PLUGS Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc. GI MA EM LC SEF156I OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-13, “ENGINE MAINTENANCE”. FE CL 10 CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE MT Refer to EM-13, “Measurement of Compression Pressure”. I Check compression pressure. Standard: 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 185 psi)/300 rpm Minimum: 1,079 kPa (11.0 kg/cm2, 156 psi)/300 rpm Difference between each cylinder: 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm AT AX OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets. 11 SU BR CHECK FUEL PRESSURE ST 1. Install any parts removed. 2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-50. 3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. RS BT HA SC SEF826X At idle: Approx. 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi) EL OK or NG OK © GO TO 13. NG © GO TO 12. IDX EC-313 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 12 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-583.) I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-51.) I Fuel lines. Refer to MA-16, “Checking Fuel Lines”. I Fuel filter for clogging © 13 Repair or replace. CHECK IGNITION TIMING Perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-107. OK or NG OK © GO TO 14. NG © Adjust ignition timing. 14 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-202. OK or NG OK © GO TO 15. NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). 15 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. at idling: 2.5 - 5.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm: 7.1 - 12.5 g·m/sec With GST Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. at idling: 2.5 - 5.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm: 7.1 - 12.5 g·m/sec OK or NG OK © GO TO 17. NG © GO TO 16. 16 CHECK CONNECTORS Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-154. OK or NG NG 17 © Repair or replace it. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART Check items on the rough idle symptom in “Symptom Matrix Chart”, EC-125. OK or NG OK © GO TO 18. NG © Repair or replace. EC-314 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 18 ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set. Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-79. © 19 GI GO TO 19. MA CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EM Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END LC Component Inspection IGNITION WIRES 1. 2. SEF174P NCEC0205 NCEC0205S01 Inspect wires for cracks, damage, burned terminals and for improper fit. Measure the resistance of wires to their distributor cap terminal. Move each wire while testing to check for intermittent breaks. Resistance: 13.6 - 18.4 kΩ/m (4.15 - 5.61 kΩ/ft) at 25°C (77°F) If the resistance exceeds the above specification, inspect ignition wire to distributor cap connection. Clean connection or replace the ignition wire with a new one. FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-315 DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Component Description Component Description NCEC0206 The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. SEF598K ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0207 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 81 WIRE COLOR W ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I Idle speed Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0325 Malfunction is detected when ... I An excessively low or high voltage from the knock sensor is sent to ECM. Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors (The knock sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Knock sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF058Y NCEC0208 NCEC0209 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2) Start engine and run it for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. 3) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-316 DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0210 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC708 EC-317 DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0211 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. SEF839X © 2 GO TO 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-1 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and knock sensor harness connector. SEF856X 3. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 81. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © GO TO 3. 3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F6, E123 I Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ECM © 4 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR Knock sensor Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-319. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace knock sensor. EC-318 DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect harness connectors F6, E123. 3. Check harness continuity between harness connector E123 terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. 5. Then reconnect harness connectors. GI MA EM OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 6 LC CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © FE INSPECTION END CL MT Component Inspection KNOCK SENSOR I 1. 2. NCEC0212 AT NCEC0212S01 Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Resistance: 500 - 620 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] CAUTION: Discard any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. AX SU BR SEF227W ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-319 DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD) Component Description Component Description SEF956N NCEC0213 The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transaxle housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the flywheel or drive plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis. SEF847X ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0214 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. ITEM CONDITION DATA (AC Voltage) 3 - 5V [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed SEF721W 65 W Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) 6 - 9V [Engine is running] I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEF722W On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0335 Malfunction is detected when ... NCEC0215 Check Items (Possible Cause) I The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position sen- I Harness or connectors sor (OBD) is not sent to ECM while the engine is running (The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) circuit is at the specified engine speed. open.) I Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) EC-320 DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD) DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF058Y NCEC0216 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2) Start engine and run it for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. 3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-323. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-321 DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0217 TEC709 EC-322 DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0218 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS GI 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. MA EM LC SEF839X © FE GO TO 2. CL 2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) and ECM harness connectors. MT AT AX SU SEF847X 2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 65 and CKPS (OBD) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © GO TO 3. 3 BR ST RS BT DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F6, E123 I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (OBD) and ECM © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. HA SC EL IDX EC-323 DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Reconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (OBD) terminal 1 and engine ground. SEF229W Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F6, E123 I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (OBD) and ECM I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (OBD) and TCM (Transmission control module) © 6 Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect harness connectors F6, E123. 2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F6 terminal 8 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. 4. Then reconnect harness connectors. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © GO TO 7. 7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F6, E123 I Joint connector-1 and -2 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) I Harness for open or short between harness connector F6 and Engine ground © 8 Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (OBD) Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-325. OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD). EC-324 DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © GI INSPECTION END MA EM LC Component Inspection CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (OBD) 1. 2. 3. 4. NCEC0219 NCEC0219S01 Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connector. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. FE CL MT SEF960N 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Resistance: 166 - 204 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD). AT AX SU BR SEF231W ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-325 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) Component Description Component Description SEF998R NCEC0220 The camshaft position sensor is a basic component of the engine control system. It monitors engine speed and piston position. These input signals to the engine control system are used to control fuel injection, ignition timing and other functions. The camshaft position sensor has a rotor plate and a wave-forming circuit. The rotor plate has 360 slits for a 1° (POS) signal and 4 slits for a 180° (REF) signal. The wave-forming circuit consists of Light Emitting Diodes (LED) and photo diodes. The rotor plate is positioned between the LED and the photo diode. The LED transmits light to the photo diode. As the rotor plate turns, the slits cut the light to generate rough-shaped pulses. These pulses are converted into on-off signals by the wave-forming circuit and sent to the ECM. The distributor is not repairable and must be replaced as an assembly except distributor cap and rotor head. SEF853B ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0221 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0.1 - 0.4V 66 [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed L SEF006W Camshaft position sensor (Reference signal) 75 L 0.1 - 0.4V [Engine is running] I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEF007W EC-326 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d) TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) GI Approximately 2.6V MA [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed EM SEF004W 85 B/W Camshaft position sensor (Position signal) Approximately 2.5V [Engine is running] I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm FE SEF005W On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0340 LC Malfunction is detected when ... A) Either 1° or 180° signal is not sent to ECM for the first few seconds during engine cranking. B) Either 1° or 180° signal is not sent to ECM often enough while the engine speed is higher than the specified engine speed. C) The relation between 1° and 180° signal is not in the normal range during the specified engine speed. MT NCEC0222 Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors (The camshaft position sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Camshaft position sensor I Starter motor (Refer to SC-10, “STARTING SYSTEM”.) I Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-10, “STARTING SYSTEM”.) I Dead (Weak) battery DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0223 Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “Procedure for malfunction B and C”. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NCEC0223S01 With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds. 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-330. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. SEF058Y EC-327 CL AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C NCEC0223S02 With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-330. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. SEF058Y EC-328 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0224 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC710 EC-329 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0225 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Does the engine turn over? (Does the starter motor operate?) Yes or No Yes © GO TO 2. No © Check starting system. (Refer to SC-10, “STARTING SYSTEM”.) 2 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. SEF839X © GO TO 3. EC-330 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. Disconnect distributor harness connector. GI MA EM LC SEF848X 2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 3. Check voltage between distributor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE CL MT SEF232W AT Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. 4 SU DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M62, F24 I Harness for open or short between distributor and ECM relay I Harness for open or short between distributor and ECM © AX BR ST Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. RS 5 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between distributor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 85, distributor terminal 4 and ECM terminals 66, 75. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. BT HA SC OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EL IDX EC-331 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check harness continuity between distributor terminal 1 and engine ground. SEF234W Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 7 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-333. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace camshaft position sensor. 8 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect joint connector-1. 3. Check the following. I Continuity between joint connector-1 terminal 1 and ground Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Joint connector-1 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. 5. Then reconnect joint connector-1. OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-332 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) Component Inspection Component Inspection =NCEC0226 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR NCEC0226S01 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminals 66, 85 and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal 66 (or 75) and engine ground Condition Idle 2,000 rpm Voltage 0.1 - 0.4V 0.1 - 0.4V GI MA EM LC SEF215X Pulse signal SEF007W SEF006W FE CL Terminal 85 and engine ground Condition Idle 2,000 rpm Voltage Approximately 2.5V Approximately 2.4V MT AT AX Pulse signal SEF004W SEF005W If NG, replace distributor assembly with camshaft position sensor. SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-333 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE) Description Description NCEC0513 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor Engine speed Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Ignition switch Start signal Throttle position sensor Throttle position Battery Battery voltage Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal Electrical load Electrical load signal PNP switch Park/Neutral position signal TCM (Transmission Control Module) Gear position, shifting signal ECM function EGR volume control NCEC0513S01 Actuator EGR volume control valve This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains close under the following conditions. I Engine stopped I Engine starting I Engine idling I Low engine coolant temperature I Excessively high engine coolant temperature I High engine speed I Wide open throttle I Low battery voltage SEF551W EC-334 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE) Description (Cont’d) COMPONENT DESCRIPTION EGR volume control valve NCEC0513S02 NCEC0513S0201 The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening. GI MA EM LC SEF552W CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0514 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION EGR TEMP SEN I Engine: After warming up EGR VOL CON/V I I I I SPECIFICATION FE Less than 4.5V Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: “OFF” Shift lever: “N” No-load CL Idle 0 step Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm quickly 10 - 55 step ECM Terminals and Reference Value MT NCEC0644 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 8 9 17 18 58 72 WIRE COLOR SB W/B R/W G/R B R/B ITEM CONDITION AT AX SU DATA (DC Voltage) BR EGR volume control valve [Engine is running] I Idle speed Sensor’s ground [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed Less than 4.5V BT [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I EGR system is operating 0 - 1.5V HA 0.1 - 14V ST EGR temperature sensor On Board Diagnosis Logic RS NCEC0515 If the absence of EGR flow is detected by EGR temperature sensor under the condition that calls for EGR, a low-flow malfunction is diagnosed. Malfunction is detected when no EGR flow is detected under condition that calls for EGR. SEF073P EC-335 SC EL IDX DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE) Possible Cause Possible Cause I I I I I I DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF191Y NCEC0517 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I P0400 will not be displayed at “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II even though DTC work support test result is NG. TESTING CONDITION: I Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 10V at idle, then stop engine immediately. I For best results, perform the test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or higher. WITH CONSULT-II 1) 2) 3) SEF192Y 4) SEF235Y NCEC0516 Harness or connectors (EGR volume control valve circuit is open or shorted.) EGR volume control valve stuck closed Dead (Weak) battery EGR passage clogged EGR temperature sensor and circuit Exhaust gas leaks 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) NCEC0517S01 Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch “ON” Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Confirm COOLAN TEMP/S value is within the range listed below. COOLAN TEMP/S: Less than 40°C (104°F) If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to lower the engine coolant temperature with a fan or means other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result. Start engine and let it idle monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S” value. When the “COOLAN TEMP/S” value reaches 70°C (158°F), immediately go to the next step. Select “EGR SYSTEM P0400” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Accelerate vehicle to a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) once and then stop vehicle with engine running. If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 10. If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. Check the output voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” (at closed throttle position) and note it. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions EC-336 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds or more.) ENG SPEED 1,800 - 2,800 rpm Vehicle speed More than 10 km/h (6 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 5.0 - 8.5 msec THRTL POS SEN (X + 0.05) – (X + 0.87) V X = Voltage value measured at step 8 Selector lever Suitable position GI MA EM If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. 10) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-339. LC FE CL MT WITH GST 1) 2) 3) SEF066X NCEC0517S02 Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Check engine coolant temperature in MODE 1 with GST. Engine coolant temperature: Less than 40°C (104°F) If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to lower the coolant temperature with a fan or means other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result. 4) Start engine and let it idle monitoring the value of “COOLAN TEMP/S”. When the engine coolant temperature reaches 70°C (158°F), immediately go to the next step. 5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute. Engine speed: 1,800 - 2,800 rpm Vehicle speed: More than 10 km/h (6 MPH) Voltage between ECM terminal 92 and ground: 0.86 - 2.0V Selector lever: Suitable position 6) Stop vehicle. 7) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds, then turn “ON”. 8) Repeat step 3 to 5. 9) Select “MODE 3” with GST. 10) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-339. I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. EC-337 AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0518 TEC755 EC-338 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0519 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM GI 1. Start engine. 2. Check exhaust pipes and muffler for leaks. MA EM LC SEF099P FE OK or NG OK © GO TO 2. NG © Repair or replace exhaust system. 2 CL MT CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect EGR volume control vale harness connector. AT AX SU BR SEF849X ST 2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 3. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. RS BT HA SC SEF327X OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © GO TO 3. EL IDX EC-339 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F23, M49 I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and EGR volume control valve © 4 Repair harness or connectors. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. MTBL0389 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5 CHECK EGR PASSAGE Check EGR passage for clogging and cracks. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Repair or replace EGR passage. EC-340 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND CIRCUIT 1. Remove EGR temperature sensor. 2. Check resistance between EGR temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR SEF919Z OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Replace EGR temperature sensor. ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-341 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 7 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-I Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6. SEF588X OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 8. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 9. NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. 8 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II With CONSULT-II Remove EGR volume control valve. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve opening steps. SEF067Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. EC-342 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 9 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II Without CONSULT-II Remove EGR volume control valve. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch position. GI MA EM LC FE SEF560W OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. 10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT CL MT AT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-343 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Description Description NCEC0520 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor Engine speed Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Ignition switch Start signal Throttle position sensor Throttle position Battery Battery voltage Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal Electrical load Electrical load signal PNP switch Park/Neutral position signal TCM (Transmission Control Module) Gear position, shifting signal ECM function EGR volume control NCEC0520S01 Actuator EGR volume control valve This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains close under the following conditions. I Engine stopped I Engine starting I Engine idling I Low engine coolant temperature I Excessively high engine coolant temperature I High engine speed I Wide open throttle I Low battery voltage SEF551W EC-344 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Description (Cont’d) COMPONENT DESCRIPTION EGR volume control valve NCEC0520S02 NCEC0520S0201 The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening. GI MA EM LC SEF552W CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0521 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EGR VOL CON/V CONDITION I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: “OFF” Shift lever: “N” No-load SPECIFICATION Idle 0 step Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm quickly 10 - 55 step FE CL MT ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0645 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 8 9 17 18 WIRE COLOR SB W/B R/W G/R ITEM EGR volume control valve CONDITION [Engine is running] I Idle speed AT AX SU DATA (DC Voltage) BR 0.1 - 14V ST RS BT HA On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0522 Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve. FAIL-SAFE MODE EGR volume control valve circuit Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,800 rpm due to the fuel cut. EC-345 EL NCEC0522S01 When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MIL illuminates. Detected items SC IDX DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Possible Cause Possible Cause I I NCEC0523 Harness or connectors (EGR volume control valve circuit is open or shorted.) EGR volume control valve DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0524 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II SEF174Y 1) 2) 3) 4) NCEC0524S01 Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Rev engine from idle to 2,000 rpm 10 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-348. WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-346 NCEC0524S02 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram =NCEC0525 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC732 EC-347 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0526 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector. SEF849X 2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 3. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF327X OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F23, M49 I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and EGR volume control valve © Repair harness or connectors. EC-348 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. GI MA EM LC MTBL0389 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. FE CL 4 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-I Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6. MT AT AX SU SEF588X OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 6. NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-349 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II With CONSULT-II Remove EGR volume control valve. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothy forward and backward according to the valve opening steps. SEF067Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. 6 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II Without CONSULT-II Remove EGR volume control valve. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch position. SEF560W OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. 7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-350 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0240 The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) and 2 (rear). A three way catalyst with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) switching frequency will increase. When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) and 2 (rear) approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst malfunction is diagnosed. P0420 MA EM LC SEF484Y DTC No. GI Malfunction is detected when ... I Three way catalyst does not operate properly. I Three way catalyst does not have enough oxygen storage capacity. Check Items (Possible Cause) I I I I I I I Three way catalyst Exhaust tube Intake air leaks Injectors Injector leaks Spark plug Improper ignition timing FE CL MT DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0241 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II SEF671Y SEF672Y NCEC0241S01 TESTING CONDITION: I Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure. I Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below. 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Start engine. 4) Rev engine up to 3,000±500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely. 5) Wait 5 seconds at idle. 6) Rev engine up to 2,500±500 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of CATALYST changes to “CMPLT” (It will take approximately 5 minutes). If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest from step 1. 7) Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. 8) Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-352. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX SEF560X EC-351 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION Overall Function Check Overall Function Check SEF074X Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0242 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. 2) Stop vehicle with engine running. 3) Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminals 62 [Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal], 63 [Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) signal] and engine ground. 4) Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. 5) Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low) between ECM terminal 63 and engine ground is much less than that of ECM terminal 62 and engine ground. Switching frequency ratio = A/B A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) voltage switching frequency B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) voltage switching frequency This ratio should be less than 0.75. If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way catalyst does not operate properly. NOTE: If the voltage at terminal 62 does not switch periodically more than 5 times within 10 seconds at step 4, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0133 first. (See EC-217.) CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent. OK or NG OK © GO TO 2. NG © Repair or replace. EC-352 NCEC0243 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 2 CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and run it at idle. 2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before the three way catalyst. GI MA EM LC SEF099P OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © Repair or replace. 3 FE CL CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK MT Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair or replace. AT AX 4 CHECK IGNITION TIMING SU Check for ignition timing. Refer to “BASIC INSPECTION”, EC-107. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Adjust ignition timing. 5 BR ST CHECK INJECTORS RS 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-575. 2. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch “ON”. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 101, 103, 105 and 107 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. BT HA SC EL SEF075X Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” INJECTOR, EC-576. EC-353 IDX DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK IGNITION SPARK Disconnect ignition wire from spark plug. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition wire. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine. Check for spark. SEF282G OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © GO TO 7. 7 CHECK IGNITION WIRES Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-315. OK or NG OK © Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-566. NG © Replace. 8 CHECK INJECTOR 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EC-51. Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 3. Disconnect distributor harness connector. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip) © GO TO 9. NG (Drips) © Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping. 9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. Trouble is fixed © INSPECTION END Trouble is not fixed © Replace three way catalyst. EC-354 DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0527 NOTE: If DTC P0440 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-525.) This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum. If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is opened to clear the line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. The EVAP canister vent control valve will then be closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT SEF323U Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control system does not operate properly. CAUTION: I Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. I If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. I Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. AX SU BR ST RS BT HA Possible Cause I I I I I I I I NCEC0528 Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve Incorrect fuel filler cap used Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks EC-355 SC EL IDX DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) Possible Cause (Cont’d) I I I I I I I I I I I I I EVAP purge line rubber tube bent. Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure sensor Loose or disconnected rubber tube EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit Fuel tank temperature sensor O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged. Water separator EVAP canister is saturated with water. EVAP control system pressure sensor Fuel level sensor and the circuit Refueling control valve ORVR system leaks DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF565X WITH CONSULT-II SEF566X NCEC0529 CAUTION: Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC confirmation procedure. NOTE: I If DTC P0440 or P1440 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-525.) I Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: I Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. I Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) NCEC0529S01 Turn ignition switch “ON”. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440/P1440” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULTII. Follow the instruction displayed. SEF567X EC-356 DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”, EC-107. 6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-357. WITH GST NCEC0529S02 NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of “Driving Pattern” on EC-74 before driving vehicle. 1) Start engine. 2) Drive vehicle according to “Driving Pattern”, EC-74. 3) Stop vehicle. 4) Select “MODE 1” with GST. I If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step. I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. 5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 6) Start engine. It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving. 7) Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving Pattern”, EC-74. 8) Stop vehicle. 9) Select “MODE 3” with GST. I If P0440 or P1440 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-357. I If P1447 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P1447, EC-516. I If P0440, P1440 and P1447 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step. 10) Select “MODE 1” with GST. I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. I If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6. Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0530 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. RS BT HA SC SEF915U OK or NG OK © GO TO 2. NG © Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. EC-357 EL IDX DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 2 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © I Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. I Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. 3 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 4. 4 CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE 1. Wipe clean valve housing. 2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. SEF427N SEF943S Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi) Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.4 kPa (−0.061 to −0.035 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi) CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. EC-358 DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. GI MA EM LC SEF850X FE CL MT SEF916U NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. Models with CONSULT-II © GO TO 6. Models without CONSULT-II © GO TO 7. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-359 DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37. SEF200U OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Repair or replace. EC-360 DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 7 CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) GI MA EM LC SEF323Z 3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.) FE CL MT AT AX SEF869X 4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37. SU BR ST RS BT HA SEF200U OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Repair or replace. SC EL IDX EC-361 DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 8 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR Check Check Check Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet. visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged. SEF829T 5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts. NOTE: I Do not disassemble water separator. OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © Replace water separator. 9 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-371. OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector. 10 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? SEF596U Yes or No Yes © GO TO 11. No (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 13. No (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 14. EC-362 DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 11 CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). GI OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 13. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 14. NG © GO TO 12. MA EM LC 12 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I EVAP canister for damage I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection © 13 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. FE Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION CL With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100.0%. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. MT AT AX SU BR SEF595Y ST OK or NG OK © GO TO 16. NG © GO TO 15. RS BT 14 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. HA SC EL OK or NG OK © GO TO 18. NG © GO TO 15. IDX EC-363 DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 15 CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-27. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 16. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 17. NG © Repair or reconnect the hose. 16 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. SEF801Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 18. NG © GO TO 17. EC-364 DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 17 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. GI MA EM LC SEF851X FE CL MT SEF334X Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. AT AX SU BR ST SEF851X RS BT HA SC SEF335X EL OK or NG OK © GO TO 18. NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. IDX EC-365 DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 18 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Remove fuel level sensor unit. 2. Check fuel tank temperature sensor. Refer to EC-290, “Component Inspection”. OK or NG OK © GO TO 19. NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit. 19 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. CAUTION: I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped. SEF799W 2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. CAUTION: I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure. 5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground. SEF342X CAUTION: I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. OK or NG OK © GO TO 20. NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC-366 DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 20 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-33. GI OK or NG OK © GO TO 21. NG © Repair or reconnect the hose. 21 MA EM CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE LC Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. © 22 GO TO 22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to “ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)”, EC-39. OK or NG OK © GO TO 23. NG © Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 23 FE CL MT CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK © GO TO 24. NG © Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube. 24 CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE AT AX SU 1. Remove fuel filler cap. 2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B. Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank. 3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage. 4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable 3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage. BR ST RS BT HA SC SEF968X EL OK or NG OK © GO TO 25. NG © Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank. IDX EC-367 DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 25 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to EL-96, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”. OK or NG OK © GO TO 26. NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit. 26 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-368 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT) Description Description NCEC0531 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor Engine speed Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Ignition switch Start signal Throttle position sensor Throttle position Throttle position switch Closed throttle position Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed NCEC0531S01 ECM function GI Actuator MA EM EVAP canEVAP canister purge volume ister purge control solenoid valve flow control LC FE CL This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. MT AT AX SU BR COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NCEC0531S02 The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. ST RS BT HA SEF337U CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode SC NCEC0532 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PURG VOL C/V EL CONDITION I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch “OFF” Shift lever: “N” No-load SPECIFICATION Idle (Vehicle stopped) 0% 2,000 rpm — EC-369 IDX DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT) ECM Terminals and Reference Value ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0646 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Idle speed 14 P SEF994U EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) SEF995U On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0533 Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve. Possible Cause I I Harness or connectors (The valve circuit is open or shorted.) EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC-370 NCEC0534 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT) DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0535 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II SEF058Y 1) 2) 3) 4) MA EM NCEC0535S01 Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-373. WITH GST GI NCEC0535S02 LC FE Follow the proocedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-371 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0536 TEC711 EC-372 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0537 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. GI MA EM LC SEF851X 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE CL MT AT SEF206W AX Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 BR DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART ST Check the following. I Harness connectors F13, F51 I Harness connectors F24, M62 I Fuse block (J/B) connector M2 I 10A fuse I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse © SU RS BT Repair harness or connectors. HA SC EL IDX EC-373 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 4. 4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F13, F51 I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM © 5 Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. SEF801Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © GO TO 6. EC-374 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. GI MA EM LC SEF334X FE Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. CL MT AT SEF335X OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 7 AX SU BR CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © ST INSPECTION END RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-375 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Component Description Component Description SEF032W NCEC0538 The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis. SEF859X CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0539 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION SPECIFICATION I Ignition switch: ON OFF ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0647 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 102 WIRE COLOR PU/W ITEM CONDITION EVAP canister vent con[Ignition switch “ON”] trol valve On Board Diagnosis Logic DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) NCEC0540 Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through EVAP canister vent control valve. EC-376 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Possible Cause Possible Cause I I NCEC0541 Harness or connectors (The valve circuit is open or shorted.) EVAP canister vent control valve GI MA EM LC DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0542 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. FE CL MT WITH CONSULT-II 1) 2) 3) 4) NCEC0542S01 Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-379. WITH GST AT AX SU NCEC0542S02 Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. BR SEF058Y ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-377 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0543 TEC712 EC-378 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0544 INSPECTION START GI 1. Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes © GO TO 2. No © GO TO 3. 2 MA EM CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LC With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then turn “ON”. 2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen. FE CL MT SEF802Y 4. Check for operating sound of the valve. Clicking noise should be heard. AT AX OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © GO TO 3. SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-379 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector. SEF859X 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF336X OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. 4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors T19, T20 I Harness connectors B113, T1 I Harness connectors B10, B120 I Harness connectors B3, M8 I Fuse block (J/B) connector M3 I 10A fuse I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and fuse © 5 Repair harness or connectors. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © GO TO 6. EC-380 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors T19, T20 I Harness connectors B113, T1 I Harness connectors B10, B120 I Harness connectors B3, M8 I Harness connectors F24, M62 I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM © 7 GI MA EM Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. LC CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG FE OK © GO TO 8. NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. CL 8 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I 1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. MT AT AX SU SEF337X BR OK or NG ST OK © GO TO 9. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-381 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 9 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II With CONSULT-II Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. SEF803Y Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. SEF339X Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © GO TO 10. 10 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III 1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. 2. Perform Test No. 9 again. OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 11 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-382 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description Component Description NCEC0545 The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. The EVAP control system pressure sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only for on board diagnosis. GI MA EM LC SEF053V FE CL MT SEF954S CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode AT NCEC0546 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION AX SPECIFICATION EVAP SYS PRES I Ignition switch: ON Approx. 3.4V ECM Terminals and Reference Value SU NCEC0648 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BR ST RS 58 B Sensor’s ground [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed Approximately 0V BT 84 W EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 3.4V HA 111 P/L Sensor’s power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V SC EL IDX EC-383 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0547 Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal from EVAP control system pressure sensor is sent to ECM. Possible Cause I I I I I I I NCEC0548 Harness or connectors (The EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Rubber hose to EVAP control system pressure sensor is clogged, vent, kinked, disconnected or improper connection. EVAP control system pressure sensor EVAP canister vent control valve EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EVAP canister Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent control valve to water separator DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0549 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) NCEC0549S01 Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-387. SEF194Y EC-384 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) WITH GST 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) NCEC0549S02 Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 82 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. Select “MODE 7” with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-387. GI MA EM LC SEF938X FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-385 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0550 TEC713 EC-386 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0551 CHECK RUBBER TUBE GI 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check rubber tube connected to the EVAP control system pressure sensor for clogging, vent, kink, disconnection or improper connection. MA EM LC SEF860X FE OK or NG CL OK © GO TO 2. NG © Reconnect, repair or replace. MT 2 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. AT AX SU BR SEF839X © 3 GO TO 3. ST RS CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair or replace harness connector. BT HA SC EL IDX EC-387 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF341X OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors T19, T20 I Harness connectors B113, T1 I Harness connectors B10, B120 I Harness connectors B3, M8 I Harness connectors F24, M62 I Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM © 6 Repair harness or connectors. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © GO TO 7. 7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors T19, T20 I Harness connectors B113, T1 I Harness connectors B102, M74 I Harness connectors F23, M49 I Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM I Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and TCM (Transmission Control Module) © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-388 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 8 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 84 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. MA EM OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 10. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 11. NG © GO TO 9. 9 LC DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART FE Check the following. I Harness connectors T19, T20 I Harness connectors B113, T1 I Harness connectors B102, M74 I Harness connectors F23, M49 I Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor © 10 GI CL MT Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. AT CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. AX SU BR ST RS SEF801Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 12. NG © GO TO 11. BT HA SC EL IDX EC-389 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 11 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. SEF851X SEF334X Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. SEF851X SEF335X OK or NG OK © GO TO 12. NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. EC-390 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 12 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. GI OK or NG OK © GO TO 13. NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 13 MA EM CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I LC 1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. FE CL MT SEF337X OK or NG OK © GO TO 14. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-391 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 2. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. SEF803Y Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. SEF339X Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. OK or NG OK © GO TO 16. NG © GO TO 15. 15 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III 1. Clean the air passage (portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. 2. Perform Test No. 14 again. OK or NG OK © GO TO 16. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. EC-392 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 16 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. CAUTION: I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped. GI MA EM LC SEF799W 2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. CAUTION: I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure. 5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground. FE CL MT AT AX SU SEF342X CAUTION: I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. BR ST OK or NG OK © GO TO 17. NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 17 RS BT CHECK RUBBER TUBE Check obstructed rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. OK or NG OK © GO TO 18. NG © Clean rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube. HA SC EL IDX EC-393 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 18 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR Check Check Check Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet. visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged. SEF829T 5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts. NOTE: I Do not disassemble water separator. OK or NG OK © GO TO 19. NG © Replace water separator. 19 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. SEF596U Yes or No Yes © GO TO 20. No © GO TO 22. 20 CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). OK or NG OK © GO TO 18. NG © GO TO 17. EC-394 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 21 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I EVAP canister for damage I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection © 22 Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect harness connectors T19, T20. 3. Check harness continuity between harness connector T20 terminal 8 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. GI MA EM LC OK or NG OK © GO TO 24. NG © GO TO 23. FE CL 23 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors T19, T20 I Harness connectors B113, T1 I Harness connectors B102, M74 I Harness connectors F23, M49 I Joint connector-1 and -2 Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”. I Harness for open or short between harness connector T20 and engine ground © 24 MT AT AX Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. SU CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © BR INSPECTION END ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-395 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK) On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0649 NOTE: If DTC P0455 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-525.) This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in the EVAP system between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. SEF323U Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system has very large leaks such as when fuel filler cap has fallen off, EVAP control system does not operate properly. CAUTION: I Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. I If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. I Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. Possible Cause I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I NCEC0650 Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve Incorrect fuel filler cap used Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks EVAP purge line rubber tube bent. Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure sensor Loose or disconnected rubber tube EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit Fuel tank temperature sensor O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged. EVAP control system pressure sensor EC-396 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK) DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF565X WITH CONSULT-II SEF566X SEF874X Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 5) Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F) 6) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440/P1440” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULTII. Follow the instruction displayed. NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”, EC-107. 7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II and make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-398. If P0440 is displayed, perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0440. MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA NCEC0651S02 NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of “Driving Pattern” on EC-74 before driving vehicle. 1) Start engine. 2) Drive vehicle according to “Driving Pattern”, EC-74. 3) Stop vehicle. 4) Select “MODE 1” with GST. I If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step. I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. 5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 6) Start engine. It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving. EC-397 GI NCEC0651S01 1) 2) 3) 4) WITH GST SEF567X NCEC0651 CAUTION: Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. NOTE: I If DTC P0455 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-525.) I Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: I Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. I Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure. SC EL IDX DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) 7) 8) 9) I Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving Pattern”, EC-74. Stop vehicle. Select “MODE 3” with GST. If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-398. I If P0440 or P1440 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, for DTC P0440, EC-357. I If P1447 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P1447, EC-516. I If P0440, P0455, P1440 and P1447 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step. 10) Select “MODE 1” with GST. I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. I If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6. Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0652 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. SEF915U OK or NG OK © GO TO 2. NG © Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. 2 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © I Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. I Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. EC-398 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. GI OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. 4 MA EM CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE 1. Wipe clean valve housing. 2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. LC FE CL SEF427N MT AT AX SU BR SEF943S Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi) Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.4 kPa (−0.061 to −0.035 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.49 psi) CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. ST RS BT HA 5 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-33. SC OK or NG EL OK © GO TO 6. NG © Repair or reconnect the hose. EC-399 IDX DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. © 7 GO TO 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-377. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector. 8 INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. SEF850X SEF916U NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. Models with CONSULT-II © GO TO 9. Models without CONSULT-II © GO TO 10. EC-400 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 9 CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. GI MA EM LC FE PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37. CL MT AT AX SU SEF200U OK or NG BR OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 11. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 12. ST NG © Repair or replace. RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-401 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 10 CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) SEF323Z 3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.) SEF869X 4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37. SEF200U OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 11. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 12. NG © Repair or replace. EC-402 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 11 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100.0%. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. GI MA EM LC FE SEF595Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 14. NG © GO TO 13. 12 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. MT CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK © GO TO 15. NG © GO TO 13. 13 CL AT AX SU BR ST CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-27. RS OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 14. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 15. NG © BT HA Repair or reconnect the hose. SC EL IDX EC-403 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. SEF801Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 16. NG © GO TO 15. EC-404 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 15 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. GI MA EM LC SEF851X FE CL MT SEF334X Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. AT AX SU BR ST SEF851X RS BT HA SC SEF335X EL OK or NG OK © GO TO 16. NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. IDX EC-405 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 16 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Remove fuel level sensor unit. 2. Check fuel tank temperature sensor. Refer to EC-290, “Component Inspection”. OK or NG OK © GO TO 17. NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit. 17 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. CAUTION: I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped. SEF799W 2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. CAUTION: I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure. 5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground. SEF342X CAUTION: I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. OK or NG OK © GO TO 18. NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 18 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-406 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH) Component Description Component Description NCEC0552 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the ECM. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. GI MA EM LC AEC801 ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0653 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION FE DATA (DC Voltage) CL 83 G/R Fuel level sensor [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with fuel level. MT 90 B Fuel level sensor ground [Engine is running] I Idle speed Approximately 0V AT AX SU BR On Board Diagnostic Logic NCEC0553 When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected when even though the vehicle is parked, a signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM. ST RS BT HA Possible Cause I I Fuel level sensor circuit (The fuel level sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Fuel level sensor NCEC0554 SC EL IDX EC-407 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH) DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0555 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II SEF195Y 1) 2) 3) 4) NCEC0555S01 Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-410. WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-408 NCEC0555S02 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0556 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC752 EC-409 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 1. 2. 3. 4. =NCEC0557 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect fuel level sensor until and fuel pump harness connector. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or a tester. SEF939XA OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M8, B3 I Harness connectors B10, B120 I Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuel level sensor unit © 3 Repair or replace harness or connectors. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit terminal 1 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 4 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and fuel level sensor unit terminal 4, ECM terminal 90 and fuel level sensor unit terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. EC-410 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors B103, M75 I Harness connectors F23, M49 I Harness connectors M8, B3 I Harness connectors B10, B120 I Harness connectors M62, F24 I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor © 6 GI MA EM Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. LC CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to EL-96, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit. 7 FE CL CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © MT INSPECTION END AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-411 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION Component Description Component Description =NCEC0558 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the ECM. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. AEC801 On Board Diagnostic Logic NCEC0559 Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level. This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has been driven. Malfunction is detected when the output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change within the specified range even though the vehicle has been driven a long distance. Possible Cause I I NCEC0560 Harness or connectors (The level sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Fuel level sensor Overall Function Check NCEC0561 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FE-5, “FUEL SYSTEM”. TESTING CONDITION: Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required. WITH CONSULT-II SEF195Y NCEC0561S01 NOTE: Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in advance. 1) Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2) Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to “Fuel Pressure Release”, EC-50. 3) Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4) Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. EC-412 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION Overall Function Check (Cont’d) 5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds then turn “ON”. 6) Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 7) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. 8) Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 9) Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) and stop it. 10) Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). 11) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. 12) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 11. If NG, check the fuel level sensor, refer to EL-96, “FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK”. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT WITH GST SEF615X NCEC0561S02 NOTE: Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in advance. 1) Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2) Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to “Fuel Pressure Release”, EC-50. 3) Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4) Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5) Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 6) Set voltmeters probe between ECM terminal 83 (fuel level sensor signal) and ground. 7) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 8) Check voltage between ECM terminal 83 and ground and note it. 9) Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment. 10) Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). 11) Confirm that the voltage between ECM terminal 83 and ground changes more than 0.03V during step 8 - 10. If NG, check component of fuel level sensor, refer to EL-96, “FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK”. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-413 DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT Component Description Component Description NCEC0562 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the ECM. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. AEC801 ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0654 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 83 G/R Fuel level sensor [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with fuel level. 90 B Fuel level sensor ground [Engine is running] I Idle speed Approximately 0V On Board Diagnostic Logic NCEC0563 ECM receives two signals from the fuel level sensor circuit. One is fuel level sensor power supply circuit, and the other is fuel level sensor ground circuit. This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction. Malfunction is detected when an excessively low or high voltage is sent from the sensor is sent to ECM. Possible Cause I I Fuel level sensor circuit (The fuel level sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Fuel level sensor EC-414 NCEC0564 DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0565 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition switch “ON”. GI MA EM LC WITH CONSULT-II 1) 2) 3) 4) NCEC0565S01 Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-417. WITH GST NCEC0565S02 FE CL Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. MT SEF195Y AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-415 DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0566 TEC753 EC-416 DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 1. 2. 3. 4. =NCEC0567 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT GI Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect fuel level sensor until and fuel pump harness connector. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. MA EM LC FE SEF939XA OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 CL MT DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M8, B3 I Harness connectors B10, B120 I Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuel level sensor unit © AT AX Repair or replace harness or connectors. SU 3 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit terminal 1 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. BR ST OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. RS BT 4 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and fuel level sensor unit terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. HA SC EL IDX EC-417 DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M62, F24 I Harness connectors M8, B3 I Harness connectors B10, B120 I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor © 6 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness on connectors. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to EL-96, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit. 7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-418 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) Component Description Component Description NCEC0272 The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM. GI MA EM LC AEC110 ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0273 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) CL 0 - Approximately 4.2V 86 Y/G Vehicle speed sensor MT [Engine is running] I Lift up the vehicle I In 2nd gear position I Vehicle speed is 40 km/h (25 MPH) AT SEF003W On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0500 Malfunction is detected when ... I The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being driven. FE AX SU NCEC0274 Check Items (Possible Cause) BR I Harness or connector (The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or shorted.) I Vehicle speed sensor ST RS BT HA DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0275 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. EC-419 SC EL IDX DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) 1) 2) 3) SEF196Y 4) 5) 6) With CONSULT-II Start engine Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-422. If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,650 - 3,000 rpm (A/T) 1,900 - 3,900 rpm (M/T) COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) B/FUEL SCHDL 4.8 - 12.0 msec (A/T) 4.5 - 10.5 msec (M/T) Selector lever Suitable position PW/ST SIGNAL OFF 7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-422. Overall Function Check NCEC0276 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP canister vent control valve circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1) Lift up drive wheels. 2) Start engine. 3) Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “MODE 1” with GST. The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. 4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-422. EC-420 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0277 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC714 EC-421 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and combination meter harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 86 and combination meter terminal 32. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F23, M49 I Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter © 3 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION Make sure that speedometer functions properly. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. 4 CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT Check the following. I Harness connectors M6, E75 I Harness connectors E33, E101 I Harness for open or short between combination meter and vehicle speed sensor OK or NG OK © Check combination meter and vehicle speed sensor. Refer to EL-83, “METERS AND GAUGES”. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-422 NCEC0278 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE Description Description NCEC0279 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor Engine speed Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Ignition switch Start signal Throttle position sensor Throttle position Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Park/neutral position Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal Battery Battery voltage Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed Intake air temperature sensor Intake air temperature NCEC0279S01 ECM function GI Actuator MA EM LC Idle air control IACV-AAC valve FE CL This system automatically controls engine idle speed to a specified level. Idle speed is controlled through fine adjustment of the amount of air which by-passes the throttle valve via IACV-AAC valve. The IACV-AAC valve changes the opening of the air by-pass passage to control the amount of auxiliary air. This valve is actuated by a step motor built into the valve, which moves the valve in the axial direction in steps corresponding to the ECM output signals. One step of IACV-AAC valve movement causes the respective opening of the air by-pass passage. (i.e. when the step advances, the opening is enlarged.) The opening of the valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The camshaft position sensor detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the step position of the IACV-AAC valve so that engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by takig into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warm up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation). MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA COMPONENT DESCRIPTION IACV-AAC Valve SEF937W NCEC0279S02 NCEC0279S0202 The IACV-AAC valve is operated by a step motor for centralized control of auxiliary air supply. This motor has four winding phases and is actuated by the output signals of ECM which turns ON and OFF two windings each in seqeunce. Each time the IACV-AAC valve opens or closes to change tha auxiliary air quantity, the ECM sends a pulse signal to the step motor. When no change in the auxiliary air quantity is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening. EC-423 SC EL IDX DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0280 MONITOR ITEM CONDITION I I I I IACV-AAC/V Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: “N” No-load SPECIFICATION Idle 5 - 20 steps 2,000 rpm — ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0281 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. 6 7 15 16 BR L R G ITEM IACV-AAC valve CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I Idle speed 0.1 - 14V On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0505 Malfunction is detected when ... NCEC0282 Check Items (Possible Cause) A) The IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly. I Harness or connectors (The IACV-AAC valve circuit is open.) I IACV-AAC valve B) The IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly. I Harness or connectors (The IACV-AAC valve circuit is shorted.) I Air control valve (Power steering) I IACV-AAC valve DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0283 NOTE: I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “Procedure for malfunction B”. I If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-65, before conducting “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. For the target idle speed, refer to the “Service Data and Specifications (SDS)”, EC-610. EC-424 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A SEF058Y NCEC0283S01 TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch “ON”. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Start engine and let it idle. 4) Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm for three seconds, then let it idle for three seconds. 5) Perform step 4 once more. 6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-427. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B SEF174Y NCEC0283S02 TESTING CONDITION: I Before performing the following procedure, make sure battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. I Always perform the test at a temperature above –10°C (14°F). With CONSULT-II 1) Open engine hood. 2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 4) Turn ignition switch “ON” again and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 5) Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. 6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-427. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-425 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0284 TEC715 EC-426 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0285 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT GI 1. Stop engine. 2. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector. MA EM LC SEF852X 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between IACV-AAC valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE CL MT AT AX SEF343X OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 SU BR DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness for open or short between IACV-AAC valve and ECM relay © ST RS Repair harness or connectors. BT HA SC EL IDX EC-427 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and IACV-AAC valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. MTBL0390 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-I Reconnect ECM harness connector and IACV-AAC valve harness connector. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to air control valve (Power steering) at intake air duct. Start engine and let it idle. Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence. SEF969X Vacuum slightly exists or does not exist. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace air control valve (Power steering). EC-428 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-II Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence when steering wheel is turned. GI MA EM LC SEF969X Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © GO TO 6. 6 1. 2. 3. 4. FE CL CHECK VACUUM PORT MT Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to air control valve (Power steering) at the vacuum port. Blow air into vacuum port. Check that air flows freely. AT AX SU BR SEF970X ST OK or NG RS OK © GO TO 7. NG © Repair or clean vacuum port. BT HA SC EL IDX EC-429 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 7 CHECK VACUUM HOSES AND TUBES 1. Disconnect vacuum hoses between air control valve (Power steering) and vacuum port, air control valve (Power steering) and intake air duct. 2. Check the hoses and tubes for cracks, clogging, improper connection or disconnection. SEF109L OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Repair hoses or tubes. 8 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE-I 1. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector. 2. Check resistance between IACV-AAC valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6. SEF214Z OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © GO TO 10. EC-430 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 9 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE-II 1. Reconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connetor and ECM harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”, and ensure the IACV-AAC valve makes operating sound according to the ignition switch position. GI MA EM LC SEF853X OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © GO TO 10. 10 FE CL REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE MT 1. Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly. 2. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-65. Is the result CMPLT or INCMP? AT CMPLT or INCMP AX CMPLT © INSPECTION END INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”. SU 11 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Reconnect all harness connectors and vacuum hoses. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Also warm up transmission to normal operating temperature. I For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates less than 0.9V. I For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. 5. Stop vehicle with engine running. 6. Check target idle speed. M/T: 800±50 rpm A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) BR ST RS BT OK or NG HA OK © GO TO 12. NG © Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-65. SC 12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © EL INSPECTION END IDX EC-431 DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH Component Description Component Description NCEC0287 A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open throttle position switch is used only for A/T control. When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. SEF505V CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0655 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine CLSD THL/P SW SPECIFICATION Throttle valve: Idle position ON Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0288 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 40 WIRE COLOR Y ITEM Throttle position switch (Closed position) CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Accelerator pedal released BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Accelerator pedal depressed Approximately 0V On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0510 Malfunction is detected when ... I Battery voltage from the closed throttle position switch is sent to ECM with the throttle valve opened. EC-432 Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors (The closed throttle position switch circuit is shorted.) I Closed throttle position switch I Throttle position sensor NCEC0289 DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF197Y Condition SEF198Y NCEC0290 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then start engine. 3) Select “CLSD THL/P SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. 4) Check the signal under the following conditions. ON Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-435. If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. VHCL SPEED SE More than 4 km/h (2 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. NCEC0291 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed throttle position switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. Without CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Check the voltage between ECM terminal 40 (Closed throttle position switch signal) and ground under the following conditions. Condition CL MT AX If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-435. Overall Function Check SU BR ST RS BT HA Voltage At idle Battery voltage At 2,000 rpm Approximately 0V 3) LC AT More than 2.3V SEF090X EM FE THRTL POS SEN 7) MA Signal indication Throttle valve: Idle position 5) 6) GI If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-435. SC EL IDX EC-433 DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0292 TEC716 EC-434 DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0293 CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT GI 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector. MA EM LC SEF837X 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between throttle position switch terminal 5 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE CL MT AT AX SEF346X OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 SU BR DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M62, F24 I 10A fuse I Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and fuse © ST RS Repair harness or connectors. BT 3 CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 40 and throttle position switch terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. HA SC EL IDX EC-435 DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle position switch I Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and TCM (Transmission control module) © 5 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AND ENGINE IDLE SPEED Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-107. MTBL0391 Models with CONSULT-II © GO TO 6. Models without CONSULT-II © GO TO 7. 6 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Remove vacuum hose connected to throttle opener. Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump and the throttle opener. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of the throttle opener. SEF793W 6. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 8. Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW” under the following conditions. Measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle. MTBL0355 OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 9. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 10. NG © GO TO 8. EC-436 DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 7 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Remove vacuum hose connected to throttle opener. Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump and the throttle opener. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of the throttle opener. GI MA EM LC FE SEF793W 6. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector. 7. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions. Resistance measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle. CL MT AT AX SU SEF940X BR OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 9. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 10. NG © GO TO 8. ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-437 DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 8 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-107. MTBL0518 Is it possible to adjust closed throttle position switch? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 9. Yes (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 10. No © Replace throttle position switch. 9 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF). Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of the throttle opener. SEF793W 6. Turn ignition switch ON. 7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 8. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditins. Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle. MTBL0230 OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Replace throttle position sensor. EC-438 DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 10 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF). Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of the throttle opener. GI MA EM LC FE SEF793W 6. Turn ignition switch ON. 7. Check voltage between ECM terminal 92 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground. Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle. CL MT AT AX SU SEF526Z BR OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Replace throttle position sensor. 11 ST RS CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © BT INSPECTION END HA SC EL IDX EC-439 DTC P0600 A/T CONTROL System Description System Description NCEC0494 These circuit lines are used to control the smooth shifting up and down of A/T during the hard acceleration/ deceleration. Voltage signals are exchanged between ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0495 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 10 Y/B A/T signal No. 3 [Engine is running] I Idle speed 0 - 1.0V 19 BR/W A/T signal No. 5 [Engine is running] I Idle speed Approximately 8V 54 Y/R A/T signal No. 1 [Engine is running] I Idle speed Approximately 0 - 1.0V 55 Y/G A/T signal No. 2 [Engine is running] I Idle speed Approximately 0 - 1.0V 56 G/Y A/T signal No. 4 [Engine is running] I Idle speed Approximately 0 - 1.0V On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0600* Malfunction is detected when ... I ECM receives incorrect voltage from TCM (Transmission control module) continuously. NCEC0496 Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors [The circuit between ECM and TCM (Transmission control module) is open or shorted.] *: This DTC can be detected only by “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” with CONSULT-II. DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF058Y NCEC0497 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Wait at least 10 seconds. 4) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-442. EC-440 DTC P0600 A/T CONTROL Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0499 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC717 EC-441 DTC P0600 A/T CONTROL Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0500 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM (Transmission control module) harness connector. TCM (Transmission control module) Selector lever SEF313W 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 10 and TCM terminal 7, ECM terminal 19 and TCM terminal 8, ECM terminal 54 and terminal 5, ECM terminal 55 and TCM terminal 6, ECM terminal 56 and TCM terminal 9. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK © GO TO 2. NG © Repair harness or connectors. 2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 10 and ground, ECM terminal 19 and ground, ECM terminal 54 and ground, ECM terminal 55 and ground, ECM terminal 56 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 2. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © Repair short to ground or short to power in harness. 3 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-442 DTC P0605 ECM Component Description Component Description NCEC0295 The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connector for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. GI MA EM LC SEF093X On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0605 Malfunction is detected when ... I ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. NCEC0296 Check Items (Possible Cause) I ECM FE CL MT DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF058Y NCEC0297 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Start engine. 4) Run engine for at least 30 seconds at idle speed. 5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-444. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-443 DTC P0605 ECM Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0298 INSPECTION START With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. See EC-443. 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. With GST Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select MODE 4 with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. See EC-443. 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. Yes or No Yes © GO TO 2. No © INSPECTION END 2 REPLACE ECM 1. Replace ECM. 2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-81. 3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-65. Is the result CMPLT or INCMP? CMPLT or INCMP CMPLT © INSPECTION END INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”. EC-444 DTC P1126 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0568 Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long enough. This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat open stuck. Malfunction is detected when the engine coolant temperature does not reach to specified temperature even though the engine has run long enough. GI MA EM LC Possible Cause I I I NCEC0569 Thermostat function Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat Engine coolant temperature sensor FE CL MT DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0570 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: I For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher. I For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) NCEC0570S01 Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to LC-12, “Thermostat”. Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F). If it is below 60°C (140°F), go to following step. If it is above 60°C (140°F), stop engine and cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions. VHCL SPEED SE WITH GST Follow the prodedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-445 AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-446. 1) AT NCEC0570S02 EL IDX DTC P1126 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0571 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor. 3. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals under the following conditions. SEF304X OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. EC-446 DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic ★ The closed loop control has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1148 Malfunction is detected when ... I The closed loop control function does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. NCEC0307 GI Check Items (Possible Cause) I The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) circuit is open or shorted. I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) MA EM LC DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF682Y NCEC0308 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: I Never raise engine speed above 3,200 rpm during the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, retry the procedure from step 4. I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. With CONSULT-II 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm and check the following. I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage should go above 0.70V at least once. I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage should go below 0.21V at least once. If the result is NG, perform “Diagnosis Procedure”, EC-448. If the result is OK, perform the following step. 4) Let engine idle at least 4 minutes. 5) Maintain the following condition at least 50 consecutive seconds. B/FUEL SCHDL More than 2.4 msec ENG SPEED More than 1,500 rpm Selector lever Suitable position VHCL SPEED SE More than 71 km/h (44 MPH) 6) During this test, P0130 DTC may be displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-448. FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-447 DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL Overall Function Check Overall Function Check SEF011X NCEC0309 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed loop control. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 62 [Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal] and engine ground. 3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. I The voltage should go above 0.70V at least once. I The voltage should go below 0.21V at least once. 4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-448. Diagnostic Procedure Refer to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0133, EC-221. EC-448 NCEC0310 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) System Description System Description NCEC0433 COOLING FAN CONTROL NCEC0433S01 Sensor Input Signal to ECM Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal Ignition switch Start signal Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure ECM function GI Actuator MA EM ECM Cooling fan relay(s) LC The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF]. OPERATION NCEC0433S02 FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT SEF932X HA CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode SC CONDITION EL NCEC0486 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM AIR COND SIG I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine SPECIFICATION Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates) ON EC-449 IDX DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d) MONITOR ITEM CONDITION I After warming up engine, idle the engine. I Air conditioner switch: OFF COOLING FAN SPECIFICATION Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature is between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C (219°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature is 105°C (221°F) or more HIGH ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0487 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 12 13 WIRE COLOR LG L/Y ITEM Cooling fan relay (High) Cooling fan relay (Low) CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I Cooling fan is not operating BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Cooling fan (High) is operating 0 - 0.6V [Engine is running] I Cooling fan is not operating BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Cooling fan is operating 0 - 0.6V On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0488 If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is indicated. Diagnostic Trouble Code No. P1217 Malfunction is detected when ... I Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat). I Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Overheat). I Engine coolant was not added to the system using the proper filling method. Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.) I Cooling fan I Radiator hose I Radiator I Radiator cap I Water pump I Thermostat For more information, refer to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-465. CAUTION: When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to MA-14, “Changing Engine Coolant”. Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to MA-18, “Changing Engine Oil”. 1) Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12, “Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”. 2) After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted. EC-450 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Overall Function Check Overall Function Check SEF621W SEF111X SEC163BA MEC475B NCEC0489 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off. With CONSULT-II 1) Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-453. 2) Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-453. 3) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4) Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 5) If the results are NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-453. With GST 1) Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-453. 2) Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-453. 3) Start engine. Be careful not to overheat engine. 4) Set temperature control lever to full cold position. 5) Turn air conditioner switch “ON”. 6) Turn blower fan switch “ON”. 7) Run engine at idle for a few minutes with air conditioner operating. Be careful not to overheat engine. 8) Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-453. If OK, go to the following step. 9) Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 10) Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”. 11) Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 12) Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 13) Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low speed. Be careful not to overheat engine. 14) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-453. EC-451 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0490 TEC777 EC-452 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0491 INSPECTION START GI Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes © GO TO 2. No © GO TO 4. 2 MA EM CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION LC With CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3. FE CL MT SEF857X 2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. AT AX SU BR ST SEF784Z 4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-459.) RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-453 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF785Z 6. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than low speed. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-462.) EC-454 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION Without CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3. GI MA EM LC SEF857X 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and let it idle. Set temperature lever at full cold position. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”. Turn blower fan switch “ON”. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. FE CL MT AT AX SEC163BA SU OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-459.) BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-455 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than low speed. MEF613EA OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-462.) 6 CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops. Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi) CAUTION: Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage. SLC754A Pressure should not drop. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Check the following for leak I Hose I Radiator I Water pump Refer to LC-10, “Water Pump”. EC-456 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 7 CHECK RADIATOR CAP Apply pressure to cap with a tester. GI MA EM LC SLC755A Radiator cap relief pressure: 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi) FE OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace radiator cap. 8 CL MT CHECK THERMOSTAT 1. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures. It should seat tightly. 2. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift. AT AX SU BR SLC343 Valve opening temperature: 82°C (180°F) [standard] Valve lift: More than 8 mm/95°C (0.31 in/203°F) 3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to LC-12, “Thermostat”. ST RS BT OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © Replace thermostat HA SC 9 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR EL Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, EC-195. OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. IDX EC-457 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 10 CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES If the cause cannot be isolated, go to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-465. © INSPECTION END EC-458 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) PROCEDURE A 1 1. 2. 3. 4. =NCEC0491S01 CHECK POWER SUPPLY GI Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 3, 7 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. MA EM LC FE SEF727W Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 MT AT DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I 10A fuse I 40A fusible links I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery © CL AX SU Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-459 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. SEF854X 3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4 and body ground. SEF728W Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1, cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and body ground. SEF729W Continuity should exist. 6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-460 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. 5 GI MA EM LC DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E75, M6 I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM © FE Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CL 6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1 Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-465. MT OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Replace cooling fan relay. 7 AT AX CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-466. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace cooling fan motors. 8 SU BR ST CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © RS INSPECTION END BT HA SC EL IDX EC-461 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) PROCEDURE B 1 1. 2. 3. 4. =NCEC0491S02 CHECK POWER SUPPLY Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF593X OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fuse I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fusible link © Repair harness or connectors. EC-462 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 7 and body ground. GI MA EM LC SEF732W Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 7 and body ground. FE CL MT AT AX SU SEF732W Continuity should exist. 6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. BR OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. ST RS 4 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. BT HA OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. SC EL 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E75, M6 I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and ECM © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-463 IDX DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3 Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-465. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Replace cooling fan relays. 7 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-466. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace cooling fan motors. 8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-464 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Main 12 Causes of Overheating Main 12 Causes of Overheating Engine Step OFF 1 Inspection item I I I I Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked radiator condenser radiator grille bumper Equipment Standard I Visual No blocking NCEC0492 Reference page GI — MA 2 I Coolant mixture I Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-11, “RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS”. 3 I Coolant level I Visual Coolant up to MAX level in reservoir tank and radiator filler neck See MA-14, “Changing Engine Coolant”. 4 I Radiator cap I Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi) (Limit) See LC-9, “System Check”. ON*2 5 I Coolant leaks I Visual No leaks See LC-9, “System Check”. ON*2 6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and lower radiator hoses Both hoses should be hot See LC-12, “Thermostat”, and LC-14, “Radiator”. ON*1 7 I Cooling fan I CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for DTC P1217 (EC-449). OFF 8 I Combustion gas leak I Color checker chemical tester 4 Gas analyzer Negative — AT ON*3 9 I Coolant temperature gauge I Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when driving — AX I Coolant overflow to reservoir tank I Visual No overflow during driving and idling See MA-14, “Changing Engine Coolant”. SU EM LC FE CL MT OFF*4 10 I Coolant return from I Visual reservoir tank to radiator Should be initial level in reservoir tank See MA-13, “ENGINE MAINTENANCE”. BR OFF 11 I Cylinder head 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping) See EM-36, “Inspection”. ST 12 I Cylinder block and pis- I Visual tons No scuffing on cylinder walls or piston See EM-59, “Inspection”. I Straight gauge feeler gauge *1: Turn the ignition switch ON. *2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. *3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes. *4: After 60 minutes of cool down time. For more information, refer to LC-15, “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS”. BT HA Component Inspection NCEC0493 COOLING FAN RELAYS-1, -2 AND -3 Conditions Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No If NG, replace relay. EC-465 SC NCEC0493S01 Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. SEF745U RS EL IDX DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT) Component Inspection (Cont’d) COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 1. 2. NCEC0493S02 Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation. Terminals Speed (+) (−) Low 1 4 High 1, 2 3, 4 Cooling fan motor SEF734W Cooling fan motor should operate. If NG, replace cooling fan motor. EC-466 DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD) (COG) Component Description Component Description SEF956N NCEC0327 The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transmission housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the flywheel or drive plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. This sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT SEF847X ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0328 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. 58 B ITEM Sensors’ ground CONDITION BR Approximately 0V ST 3 - 5V (AC range) [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed RS SEF721W 65 W AX SU DATA (AC Voltage) [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed AT Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) BT 6 - 9V (AC range) HA [Engine is running] I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SC SEF722W EL On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1336 Malfunction is detected when ... I A chipping of the flywheel or drive plate gear tooth (cog) is detected by the ECM. EC-467 Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors I Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) I Drive plate/Flywheel NCEC0329 IDX DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD) (COG) DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF058Y NCEC0330 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2) Start engine and run it for at least 4 minutes at idle speed. 3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-470. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-468 DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD) (COG) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0331 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC709 EC-469 DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD) (COG) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0332 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. © 2 GO TO 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) and ECM harness connectors. SEF847X 2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 65 and terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © GO TO 3. 3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F6, E123 I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (OBD) and ECM © 4 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Reconnect ECM harness connectors. 2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (OBD) terminal 1 and engine ground. SEF229W Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. EC-470 DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD) (COG) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F6, E123 I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (OBD) and ECM I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (OBD) and TCM (Transmission control module) © GI MA Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. EM 6 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect harness connectors F6, E123. 2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F6 terminal 8 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist 3. Also check harness for short to power. 4. Then reconnect harness connectors. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © GO TO 7. 7 Check the following. I Harness connectors F6, E123 I Joint connector-1 (Refer to EL-314, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) I Harness for open or short between harness connector F6 and engine ground 8 FE CL DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART © LC MT AT Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. AX CHECK IMPROPER INSTALLATION Loosen and retighten the fixing bolt of the crankshaft position sensor (OBD). Then retest. Trouble is not fixed. © SU GO TO 9. BR 9 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (OBD) Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-472. ST OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD). RS BT 10 CHECK GEAR TOOTH Visually check for chipping flywheel or drive plate gear tooth (cog). OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Replace the flywheel or drive plate. 11 HA SC EL CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © IDX INSPECTION END EC-471 DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (OBD) (COG) Component Inspection Component Inspection CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (OBD) 1. 2. 3. 4. NCEC0333S01 Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connector. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. SEF960N 5. NCEC0333 Check resistance as shown in the figure. Resistance: 166 - 204 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] SEF231W EC-472 DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Component Description Component Description NCEC0572 The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the EGR passage way. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passage way changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis. GI MA EM LC SEF599K EGR temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance MΩ 0 (32) 4.56 0.73 - 0.89 50 (122) 2.25 0.074 - 0.082 100 (212) 0.59 0.012 - 0.014 FE CL *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 72 (EGR temperature sensor) and ground. When EGR system is operating. Voltage: 0 - 1.5V CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. MT AT AX SU BR SEF068X On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0573 Malfunction is detected when (Malfunction A) an excessively low voltage from the EGR perature sensor is sent to ECM even when engine coolant perature is low. (Malfunction B) an excessively high voltage from the EGR perature sensor is sent to ECM even when engine coolant perature is high. ST temtem- RS temtem- BT HA Possible Cause MALFUNCTION A I I I I NCEC0574S02 Harness or connectors (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is open.) EGR temperature sensor EC-473 SC NCEC0574S01 Harness or connectors (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is shorted.) EGR temperature sensor Malfunction of EGR function MALFUNCTION B I NCEC0574 EL IDX DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Possible Cause (Cont’d) I Malfunction of EGR function DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0575 Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A With CONSULT-II 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) NCEC0575S01 NCEC0575S0101 Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Verify that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 50°C (122°F). If the engine coolant temperature is above the range, cool the engine down. Start engine and let it idle for at least 8 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-477. SEF174Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-474 NCEC0575S0102 DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B NCEC0575S02 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform the test at a temperature above –10°C (14°F). With CONSULT-II 1) 2) SEF200Y 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) SEF201Y 1,800 - 2,800 rpm VHCL SPEED SE 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more B/FUEL SCHDL 5.0 - 8.5 msec THRTL POS SEN (X + 0.05) – (X – 0.87) V X = Voltage value measured at step 6 Selector lever Suitable position 3) SEF066X Vehicle speed 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more FE CL MT SU NCEC0575S0202 1,800 - 2,800 rpm LC AX Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds, then turn “ON”. Select “MODE 1” with GST and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. Engine speed EM AT If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-477. With GST 1) 2) MA NCEC0575S0201 Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Hold engine speed at 1,500 rpm. Touch “Qu” and set the EGR volume control valve opening to 50 step and check EGR TEMP SEN. EGR TEMP SEN should decrease to less than 1.0V. If the check result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-477. If the check result is OK, go to the following step. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds then turn “ON”. Check the output voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” (at closed throttle position) and note it. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 8) GI BR ST RS BT HA Voltage between ECM terminal 0.86 - 2.0V 92 and ground Selector lever 4) 5) Suitable position Select “MODE 7” with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-477. SC EL IDX EC-475 DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0576 TEC719 EC-476 DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0577 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT GI 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector. MA EM LC SEF849X 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between EGR temperature sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE CL MT AT AX SEF945X OK or NG OK © GO TO 2. NG © Repair or replace harness or connectors. 2 SU BR CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check harness continuity between EGR temperature sensor terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. ST RS OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © GO TO 3. BT HA 3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness for open or short between ECM and EGR temperature sensor I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and EGR temperature sensor © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector. SC EL IDX EC-477 DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Remove EGR temperature sensor. 2. Check resistance between EGR temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. SEF919Z OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace EGR temperature sensor. EC-478 DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-I 1. Disconnect EGR volume control valve. 2. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6. GI MA EM LC SEF588X OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 7. NG © FE CL Replace EGR volume control valve. MT 6 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II With CONSULT-II Remove EGR volume control valve. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve opening steps. AT AX SU BR ST RS SEF067Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. BT HA SC EL IDX EC-479 DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 7 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II Without CONSULT-II Remove EGR volume control valve. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON and OFF. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch position. SEF560W OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. 8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-480 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) Description Description NCEC0578 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor Engine speed Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Ignition switch Start signal Throttle position sensor Throttle position Battery Battery voltage Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal Electrical load Electrical load signal Park/Neutral position switch Park/Neutral position TCM (Transmission Control Module) Gear position, shifting signal NCEC0578S01 ECM function GI Actuator MA EM LC EGR volume control EGR volume control valve FE CL MT This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains close under the following conditions. I Engine stopped I Engine starting I Engine idling I Low engine coolant temperature I Excessively high engine coolant temperature I High engine speed I Wide open throttle I Low battery voltage AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC SEF551W EL IDX EC-481 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) Description (Cont’d) COMPONENT DESCRIPTION EGR Volume Control Valve NCEC0578S02 NCEC0578S0201 The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening. SEF552W CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0579 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION EGR TEMP SEN I Engine: After warming up EGR VOL CON/V I I I I SPECIFICATION Less than 4.5V Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: “OFF” Shift lever: “N” No-load Idle 0 step Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm quickly 10 - 55 step ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0656 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 8 9 17 18 SB W/B R/W G/R EGR volume control valve [Engine is running] I Idle speed 0.1 - 14V 58 B Sensor’s ground [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed Less than 4.5V [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I EGR system is operating 0 - 1.5V 72 R/B EGR temperature sensor On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0580 If the EGR temperature sensor detects EGR flow under the condition that does not call for EGR, a high-flow malfunction is diagnosed. Malfunction is detected when EGR flow is detected under condition that does not call for EGR. SEF073P EC-482 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) On Board Diagnosis Logic (Cont’d) NOTE: Diagnosis for this DTC will occur when engine coolant temperature is below 50 to 60°C (122 to 140°F). Therefore, it will be better to turn ignition switch “ON” (start engine) at the engine coolant temperature below 30°C (86°F) when starting DTC confirmation procedure. GI MA EM LC Possible Cause I I I NCEC0581 Harness or connectors (EGR volume control valve circuit is open or shorted.) EGR volume control valve leaking or stuck open EGR temperature sensor FE CL MT DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF202Y SEF203Y NCEC0582 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: I Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). I Engine coolant temperature and EGR temperature must be verified in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II before starting DTC WORK SUPPORT test. If it is out of range below, the test cannot be conducted. COOLAN TEMP/S: −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)* EGR TEMP SEN: Less than 4.8V If the values are out of the ranges indicated above, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to reduce the engine coolant temperature or EGR temperature with a fan or means other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result. *: Although CONSULT-II screen displays “–10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)” as a range of engine coolant temperature, ignore it. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-483 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) WITH CONSULT-II 1) 2) 3) 4) SEF204Y 5) WITH GST 1) 2) 3) SEF236Y 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I NCEC0582S01 Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn “ON”. Select “EGR SYSTEM P1402” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II screen is turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take 80 seconds or more.) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, turn ignition “OFF” and cool the engine coolant temperature to the range of −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F). Retry from step 1. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-486. NCEC0582S02 Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “MODE 1” with GST. Check that engine coolant temperature is within the range of −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F). Check that voltage between ECM terminal 72 (EGR temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.8V. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Stop engine. Perform from step 1 to 4. Select “MODE 3” with GST. If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-486. When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. SEF947X EC-484 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0583 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC755 EC-485 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0584 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector. SEF849X 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF327X OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F23, M49 I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and EGR volume control valve © Repair harness or connectors. EC-486 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. GI MA EM LC MTBL0389 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-487 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Remove EGR temperature sensor. 2. Check resistance between EGR temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. SEF919Z OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace EGR temperature sensor. EC-488 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-I Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6. GI MA EM LC SEF588X OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 7. NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. 6 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. FE CL MT CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II With CONSULT-II Remove EGR volume control valve. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve opening steps. AT AX SU BR ST RS SEF067Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. BT HA SC EL IDX EC-489 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 7 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II Without CONSULT-II Remove EGR volume control valve. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON and OFF. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch position. SEF560W OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. 8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-490 DTC P1440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (POSITIVE PRESSURE) On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0585 NOTE: If DTC P1440 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-525.) This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using of vapor pressure in the fuel tank. The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve will then be opened to clear the line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. The EVAP control system pressure sensor can now monitor the pressure inside the fuel tank. If pressure increases, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the vacuum cut valve and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT SEF323U Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control system does not operate properly. CAUTION: I Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. I If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. I Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA Possible Cause I I I I I I I I NCEC0586 Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve Incorrect fuel filler cap used Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks EC-491 SC EL IDX DTC P1440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (POSITIVE PRESSURE) Possible Cause (Cont’d) I I I I I I I I I I I I I EVAP purge line rubber tube bent. Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure sensor Loose or disconnected rubber tube EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve Fuel tank temperature sensor O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged. Water separator EVAP canister is saturated with water. Fuel level sensor and the circuit EVAP control system pressure sensor Refueling control valve ORVR system leaks DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0587 Refer to “P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)”, EC-356. Diagnostic Procedure NCEC0588 Refer to “P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)”, EC-357. EC-492 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Description Description NCEC0589 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor Engine speed Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Ignition switch Start signal Throttle position sensor Throttle position Throttle position switch Closed throttle position Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed NCEC0589S01 ECM function GI Actuator MA EM EVAP canEVAP canister purge volume ister purge control solenoid valve flow control LC FE CL This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. MT AT AX SU BR COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NCEC0589S02 The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. ST RS BT HA SEF337U CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode SC NCEC0590 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PURG VOL C/V EL CONDITION I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch “OFF” Shift lever: “N” No-load SPECIFICATION Idle (Vehicle stopped) 0% 2,000 rpm — EC-493 IDX DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ECM Terminals and Reference Value ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0657 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Idle speed 14 P SEF994U EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) SEF995U On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0591 Malfunction is detected when the canister purge flow is detected during the specified driving conditions, even when EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is completely closed. Possible Cause I I I I I NCEC0592 EVAP control system pressure sensor EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (The valve is stuck open.) EVAP canister vent control valve EVAP canister Hoses (Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.) EC-494 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0593 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. GI MA EM LC WITH CONSULT-II 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) SEF205Y 7) WITH GST SEF206Y 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) NCEC0593S01 Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take for approximately 10 seconds.) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-497. FE CL MT AT AX NCEC0593S02 Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. Select “MODE 7” with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-497. SU BR ST RS BT HA SEF237Y SC EL IDX EC-495 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0594 TEC711 EC-496 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0595 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. GI MA EM LC SEF851X 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE CL MT AT AX SEF948X OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 BR ST DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M62, F24 I Harness connectors F13, F51 I Fuse block (J/B) connector M2 I 10A fuse I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse © SU RS BT Repair harness or connectors. HA 3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. EC-497 SC EL IDX DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F13, F51 I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM © 5 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor. SEF860X OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Repair it. 6 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC-498 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 7 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. CAUTION: I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped. GI MA EM LC SEF799W 2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. CAUTION: I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure. 5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground. FE CL MT AT AX SU SEF342X CAUTION: I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. BR ST OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 8. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 9. NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-499 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 8 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. SEF801Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © GO TO 9. 9 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. SEF334X Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. SEF335X OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. EC-500 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 10 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. GI OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 11 MA EM CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I LC 1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. FE CL MT SEF337X OK or NG OK © GO TO 12. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-501 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 12 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II With CONSULT-II Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. SEF803Y Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. SEF339X Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. OK or NG OK © GO TO 14. NG © GO TO 13. 13 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III 1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. 2. Perform procedure 10 again. OK or NG OK © GO TO 14. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. EC-502 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 14 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. GI MA EM LC SEF596U Yes or No Yes © GO TO 15. No © GO TO 18. 15 CL CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). OK or NG OK © GO TO 17. NG © GO TO 16. 16 MT AT AX DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART SU Check the following. I EVAP canister for damage I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separater for clogging or poor connection © FE BR Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-503 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 17 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR Check Check Check Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet. visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged. SEF829T 5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts. NOTE: I Do not disassemble water separator. OK or NG OK © GO TO 18. NG © Clean or replace water separator. 18 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-504 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CLOSE) Component Description Component Description SEF032W NCEC0596 The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT SEF859X CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode AT CONDITION AX NCEC0597 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V SPECIFICATION I Ignition switch: ON OFF ECM Terminals and Reference Value SU NCEC0658 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 102 WIRE COLOR PU/W ITEM CONDITION EVAP canister vent con[Ignition switch “ON”] trol valve DATA (DC Voltage) BR ST RS BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BT HA On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0598 Malfunction is detected when EVAP canister vent control valve remains closed under specified driving conditions. SC EL IDX EC-505 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CLOSE) Possible Cause Possible Cause I I I I I NCEC0599 EVAP canister vent control valve EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve Water separator EVAP canister is saturated with water. DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0600 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II SEF189Y NCEC0600S01 1) 2) 3) 4) Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle at a speed of approximately 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a maximum of 15 minutes. NOTE: If a malfunction exists, NG result may be displayed quicker. 5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-508. WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-506 NCEC0600S02 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CLOSE) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0601 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC712 EC-507 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CLOSE) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0602 CHECK RUBBER TUBE 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 3. Check the rubber tube for clogging. SEF859X OK or NG OK © GO TO 2. NG © Clean rubber tube using an air blower. 2 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR Check Check Check Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet. visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged. SEF829T 5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts. NOTE: I Do not disassemble water separator. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © Clean or replace water separator. EC-508 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CLOSE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I 1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. GI MA EM LC SEF337X OK or NG FE OK © GO TO 4. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. CL 4 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II MT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. AT AX SU BR SEF803Y Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. ST RS BT HA SC SEF339X EL Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. EC-509 IDX DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CLOSE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III 1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. 2. Perform the procedure 4 again. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 6 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. SEF596U Yes or No Yes © GO TO 7. No © GO TO 9. 7 CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © GO TO 8. 8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I EVAP canister for damage I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection © 9 Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor. OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Repair it. EC-510 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CLOSE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 10 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. GI MA EM LC SEF860X 2. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-511 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CLOSE) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 11 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. CAUTION: I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped. SEF799W 2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. CAUTION: I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure. 5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground. SEF342X CAUTION: I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. OK or NG OK © GO TO 12. NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-512 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW MONITORING System Description System Description NCEC0603 NOTE: If DTC P1447 is displayed with P0510, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0510 first. (See EC-432.) GI MA EM LC SEF323U In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions. Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum. FE CL MT On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0604 Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow are adequate. If not, a fault is determined. Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between intake manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor. AT AX SU BR Possible Cause I I I I I I I I I NCEC0605 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve stuck closed EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube Blocked rubber tube Cracked EVAP canister EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit Closed throttle position switch Blocked purge port EVAP canister vent control valve ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-513 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW MONITORING DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0606 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II SEF207Y 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) SEF208Y NCEC0606S01 Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds. Select “PURG FLOW P1447” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.) Selector lever Suitable position Vehicle speed 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH) ENG SPEED 500 - 3,650 rpm B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.9 msec Engine coolant temperature More than 70°C (158°F) 7) SEF238Y If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-516. Overall Function Check NCEC0607 Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1) 2) SEF355X 3) 4) NCEC0607S01 Lift up drive wheels. Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds. EC-514 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW MONITORING Overall Function Check (Cont’d) 5) 6) 7) Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 84 (EVAP control system pressure sensor signal) and ground. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed and note it. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute. Air conditioner switch ON Steering wheel Fully turned Headlamp switch ON Rear window defogger switch ON Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm Gear position Any position other than “P”, “N” or “R” 8) 9) Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for at least 1 second. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-516. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-515 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW MONITORING Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 =NCEC0608 CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check EVAP canister for cracks. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 2. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 3. NG © Replace EVAP canister. 2 CHECK PURGE FLOW With CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. SEF850X 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and let it idle. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence. SEF804Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © GO TO 4. EC-516 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW MONITORING Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK PURGE FLOW Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Stop engine. 3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. GI MA EM LC SEF850X 4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. 5. Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. 6. Release the accelerator pedal fully and let idle. Vacuum should not exist. FE CL MT OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © GO TO 4. 4 AT AX CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Repair it. SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-517 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW MONITORING Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT 1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B. SEF367U 2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C. 3. Check that air flows freely. SEF368U OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 7. NG © Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port. 6 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. SEF801Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © GO TO 7. EC-518 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW MONITORING Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 7 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. GI MA EM LC SEF334X FE Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. CL MT AT SEF335X OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 8 AX SU BR CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor. OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © Repair it. ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-519 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW MONITORING Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 9 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. SEF860X 2. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 10 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure” for DTC P0450, EC-384. OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 11 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK © GO TO 12. NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 12 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I 1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. SEF337X OK or NG OK © GO TO 13. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. EC-520 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW MONITORING Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 13 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II With CONSULT-II Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. GI MA EM LC SEF803Y FE CL Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. MT AT AX SU SEF339X Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. OK or NG BR OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 15. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 16. ST NG © GO TO 14. RS 14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III 1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. 2. Perform Test No. 13 again. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 15. OK (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 16. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. BT HA SC EL IDX EC-521 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW MONITORING Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 15 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH With CONSULT-II Install all removed parts. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Remove vacuum hose connected to throttle opener. Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump and the throttle opener. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of the throttle opener. SEF793W 7. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 8. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW” under the following conditions. Measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle. MTBL0355 OK or NG OK © GO TO 18. NG © GO TO 17. EC-522 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW MONITORING Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 16 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH Without CONSULT-II Install all removed parts. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Remove vacuum hose connected to throttle opener. Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump and the throttle opener. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of the throttle opener. GI MA EM LC FE SEF793W 7. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector. 8. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions. Resistance measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle. CL MT AT AX SU SEF940X OK or NG OK © GO TO 18. NG © GO TO 17. 17 BR ST RS ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH BT Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-107. HA SC EL MTBL0518 Is it possible to adjust closed throttle position switch? Yes or No Yes © GO TO 18. No © Replace throttle position switch. EC-523 IDX DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW MONITORING Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 18 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37. OK or NG OK © GO TO 19. NG © Replace it. 19 CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. © 20 GO TO 20. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-524 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (OPEN) Component Description Component Description SEF032W NCEC0609 NOTE: If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT SEF859X CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode AT CONDITION AX NCEC0610 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V SPECIFICATION I Ignition switch: ON OFF ECM Terminals and Reference Value SU NCEC0659 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 102 WIRE COLOR PU/W ITEM CONDITION EVAP canister vent con[Ignition switch “ON”] trol valve DATA (DC Voltage) BR ST RS BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BT HA On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0611 Malfunction is detected when EVAP canister vent control valve remains opened under specified driving conditions. SC EL IDX EC-525 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (OPEN) Possible Cause Possible Cause I I I I I I NCEC0612 EVAP canister vent control valve EVAP control system pressure sensor and circuit Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve Water separator EVAP canister is saturated with water. Vacuum cut valve DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0613 NOTE: I If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440 or P1440, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II SEF565X COOLAN TEMP/S 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F) 5) SEF566X NCEC0613S01 TESTING CONDITION: I Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. I Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 4) Make sure that the following conditions are met. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440/P1440” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULTII. Follow the instruction displayed. If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”, EC-107. 6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, go to the following step. NOTE: Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. 7) Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds, then turn “ON”. 8) Disconnect hose from water separator. 9) Select “VENT CONTROL/V” of “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 10) Touch “ON” and “OFF” alternately. SEF567X EC-526 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (OPEN) DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) 11) Make sure the following. Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B ON No OFF Yes GI MA If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-529. If the result is OK, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0440, EC-357. EM LC SEF805Y Overall Function Check NCEC0614 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP canister vent control valve circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. FE WITH GST 1) 2) 3) NCEC0614S01 Disconnect hose from water separator. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector. Verify the following. AEC783A Condition Air passage continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No No supply Yes If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-529. If the result is OK, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0440, EC-357. CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-527 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (OPEN) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0615 TEC712 EC-528 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (OPEN) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0616 CHECK RUBBER TUBE GI 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 3. Check the rubber tube for clogging. MA EM LC SEF859X FE OK or NG CL OK © GO TO 2. NG © Clean rubber tube using an air blower. MT 2 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I 1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. AT AX SU BR SEF337X ST OK or NG RS OK © GO TO 3. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. BT HA SC EL IDX EC-529 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (OPEN) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. SEF803Y Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. SEF339X Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. 4 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III 1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. 2. Perform Test No. 3 again. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. EC-530 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (OPEN) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove vacuum cut valve. 3. Check vacuum cut valve as follows: GI MA EM LC SEF379Q FE a. Plug port C and D with fingers. b. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B. c. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A. d. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A. e. Open port C and D. f. Blow air in port A check that air flows freely out of port C. g. Blow air in port B check that air flows freely out of port D. CL MT OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Replace vacuum cut valve. AT AX 6 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. SU BR ST RS SEF596U Yes or No Yes © GO TO 7. No © GO TO 9. 7 BT HA SC CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © GO TO 8. EC-531 EL IDX DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (OPEN) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I EVAP canister for damage I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection © 9 Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor. OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Repair it. 10 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. SEF860X 2. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC-532 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (OPEN) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 11 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. CAUTION: I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped. GI MA EM LC SEF799W 2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. CAUTION: I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure. 5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground. FE CL MT AT AX SU SEF342X CAUTION: I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. BR ST OK or NG OK © GO TO 12. NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 12 RS BT CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © HA INSPECTION END SC EL IDX EC-533 DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL) Component Description Component Description NCEC0617 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the ECM. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. AEC801 ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0660 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 83 G/R Fuel level sensor [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with fuel level. 90 B Fuel level sensor ground [Engine is running] Approximately 0V On Board Diagnostic Logic NCEC0618 ECM receives two signals from the fuel level sensor. One is fuel level sensor power supply circuit, and the other is fuel level sensor ground circuit. This diagnosis indicates the latter to detect open circuit malfunction. Malfunction is detected when a high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. Possible Cause I Fuel level sensor circuit (The fuel level sensor circuit is open or shorted.) EC-534 NCEC0619 DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL) DTC Confirmation Procedure DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0620 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. GI MA EM LC WITH CONSULT-II 1) 2) 3) 4) NCEC0620S01 Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-537. WITH GST NCEC0620S02 FE CL Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. MT SEF195Y AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-535 DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0621 TEC754 EC-536 DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 =NCEC0622 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT GI 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 90 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. MA OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 LC DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. Check the following. I Harness connectors F23, M49 I Harness connectors M75, B103 I Harness for open and short between ECM and body ground © 3 EM Replace open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FE CL MT Refer to EL-96, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”. OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit. 4 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146 OK or NG © INSPECTION END AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-537 DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT) Description Description =NCEC0623 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION SEF861X NCEC0623S01 The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister. The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from being applied to the fuel tank. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the fuel tank. EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM NCEC0623S02 SEF323U CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0624 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VC/V BYPASS/V CONDITION SPECIFICATION I Ignition switch: ON OFF ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0661 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 2 WIRE COLOR PU/R ITEM Vacuum cut valve bypass valve CONDITION [Ignition switch “ON”] EC-538 DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT) On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0625 Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through vacuum cut valve bypass valve. GI MA EM LC Possible Cause I I NCEC0626 Harness or connectors (The vacuum cut valve bypass valve circuit is open or shorted.) Vacuum cut valve bypass valve FE CL MT DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0627 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle speed. AT AX SU BR WITH CONSULT-II 1) 2) 3) 4) NCEC0627S01 Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-541. WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. ST RS BT NCEC0627S02 HA SEF058Y SC EL IDX EC-539 DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT) Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0628 TEC720 EC-540 DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0629 INSPECTION START GI Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes © GO TO 2. No © GO TO 3. 2 MA EM CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE CIRCUIT LC With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”. 2. Select “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen. FE CL MT SEF806Y AT 4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the vacuum cut valve bypass valve. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © GO TO 3. AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-541 DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALUE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass valve harness connector. SEF861X 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between vacuum cut valve bypass valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF356X OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. 4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M8, B3 I Harness connectors B10, B120 I Harness connectors B113, T1 I Harness connectors T20, T19 I Fuse block (J/B) connector M3 I 10A fuse I Harness for open or short between vacuum cut valve bypass valve and fuse © 5 Repair harness or connectors. CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 and vacuum cut valve bypass valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © GO TO 6. EC-542 DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT) Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors T19, T20 I Harness connectors T1, B113 I Harness connectors B120, B10 I Harness connectors B3, M8 I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness for open or short between vacuum cut valve bypass valve and ECM © 7 1. 2. 3. 4. GI MA EM Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. LC CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE With CONSULT-II Reconnect harness disconnected connectors. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. FE CL MT AT SEF807Y Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. AX SU BR ST RS SEF557Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace vacuum cut valve bypass valve. 8 BT HA SC CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © EL INSPECTION END IDX EC-543 DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Description Description NCEC0630 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION SEF861X NCEC0630S01 The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister. The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from being applied to the fuel tank. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the fuel tank. EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM NCEC0630S02 SEF323U CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0631 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VC/V BYPASS/V CONDITION SPECIFICATION I Ignition switch: ON OFF ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0662 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 2 WIRE COLOR PU/R ITEM Vacuum cut valve bypass valve CONDITION [Ignition switch “ON”] EC-544 DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE On Board Diagnosis Logic On Board Diagnosis Logic NCEC0632 Malfunction is detected when vacuum cut valve bypass valve does not operate properly. GI MA EM LC Possible Cause I I I I I I I I I NCEC0633 Vacuum cut valve bypass valve Vacuum cut valve Bypass hoses for clogging EVAP control system pressure sensor and circuit EVAP canister vent control valve Hose between fuel tank and vacuum cut valve clogged Hose between vacuum cut valve and EVAP canister clogged EVAP canister EVAP purge port of fuel tank for clogging DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0634 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5 to 30°C (41 to 86°F). 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) SEF211Y SEF239Y Turn ignition switch “ON”. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds. Select “VC CUT/V BP/V P1491” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 30 seconds.) More than 1,000 rpm Selector lever Suitable position Vehicle speed More than 37 km/h (23 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 – 8.9 msec If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 3. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-548. EC-545 MT AT AX SU NCEC0634S01 ENG SPEED 8) CL BR WITH CONSULT-II SEF210Y FE ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Overall Function Check Overall Function Check NCEC0635 Use this procedure to check the overall function of vacuum cut valve bypass valve. During this check, the 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) NCEC0635S01 Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A. Supply battery voltage to the terminal. Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B. Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-548. SEF530Q EC-546 DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0636 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC720 EC-547 DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0637 INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes © GO TO 2. No © GO TO 3. 2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and touch “ON”. Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B. Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A. SEF808Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © GO TO 5. EC-548 DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OPERATION Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A. Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass valve harness connector. Supply battery voltage to the terminal. Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B. Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A. GI MA EM LC FE CL MT SEF914U AT OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © GO TO 7. AX SU 4 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging or disconnection. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Repair it. 5 BR ST RS CHECK EVAP PURGE PORT Check EVAP purge port of fuel tank for clogging. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Clean EVAP purge port. BT HA SC EL IDX EC-549 DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Pinch the fresh air hose. 2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B. AEC630A OK or NG OK © GO TO 12. NG © Replace EVAP canister. 7 CHECK BYPASS HOSE Check bypass hoses for clogging. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Repair or replace hoses. EC-550 DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 8 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 2. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. GI MA EM LC SEF807Y FE Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. CL MT AT AX SEF557Y OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © Replace vacuum cut valve bypass valve. SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-551 DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 9 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE Check vacuum cut valve as follows: SEF379Q a. Plug port C and D with fingers. b. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B. c. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A. d. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A. e. Open port C and D. f. Blow air in port A check that air flows freely out of port C. g. Blow air in port B check that air flows freely out of port D. OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Replace vacuum cut valve. 10 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor. OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Repair or replace. 11 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. SEF860X 2. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK © GO TO 12. NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC-552 DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 12 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. CAUTION: I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped. GI MA EM LC SEF799W 2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. CAUTION: I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure. 5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground. FE CL MT AT AX SU SEF342X CAUTION: I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. BR ST OK or NG OK © GO TO 13. NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 13 RS BT CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. HA OK or NG OK © GO TO 14. NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. SC EL IDX EC-553 DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I 1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. SEF337X OK or NG OK © GO TO 15. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 15 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II With CONSULT-II Reconnect harness disconnected connectors. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. SEF803Y Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. SEF339X Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. OK or NG OK © GO TO 17. NG © GO TO 16. EC-554 DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 16 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III 1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. 2. Perform the Test No. 15 again. OK or NG OK © GO TO 17. NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 17 GI MA EM CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © LC INSPECTION END FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-555 DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE System Description System Description NCEC0418 The malfunction information related to A/T (Automatic Transaxle) is transferred through the line (circuit) from TCM (Transmission Control Module) to ECM. Therefore, be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only in TCM (Transmission Control Module) but also ECM after the A/T related repair. ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0419 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 91 WIRE COLOR PU ITEM CONDITION A/T check signal DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - Approximately 5V On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1605 Malfunction is detected when ... I An incorrect signal from TCM (Transmission Control Module) is sent to ECM. Check Items (Possible Cause) I Harness or connectors [The communication line circuit between ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module) is open or shorted.] I Dead (Weak) battery I TCM (Transmission Control Module) DTC Confirmation Procedure SEF058Y NCEC0420 NCEC0421 NOTE: If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT. 3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 40 seconds. 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-558. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-556 DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0422 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC721 EC-557 DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0423 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM harness connector. TCM (Transmission control module) Selector lever SEF313W 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 91 and TCM terminal 15. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 2. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 2 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-558 DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH Component Description Component Description NCEC0424 When the gear position is “P” (A/T models only) or “N”, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is “ON”. ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground exists. GI MA EM LC SEF740W CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0425 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION I Ignition switch: ON P/N POSI SW SPECIFICATION Shift lever: “P” or “N” ON Except above OFF FE CL ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0426 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 42 WIRE COLOR G/OR ITEM CONDITION PNP switch DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch “ON”] I Gear position is “Neutral position” (M/T models) I Gear position is “N” or “P” (A/T models) Approximately 0V [Ignition switch “ON”] I Except the above gear position BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1706 Malfunction is detected when ... I The signal of the PNP switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and driving. MT AT AX SU BR ST NCEC0427 Check Items (Possible Cause) RS I Harness or connectors (The PNP switch circuit is open or shorted.) I PNP switch BT HA DTC Confirmation Procedure NCEC0428 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. SEF212Y EC-559 SC EL IDX DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d) 2) Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions. Position (Selector lever) SEF213Y Known-good signal “N” and “P” (A/T only) position ON Except the above position OFF 3) 4) 5) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-562. If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 50 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,400 rpm COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) B/FUEL SCHDL 2.4 - 12 msec VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position 6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-562. Overall Function Check NCEC0429 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. Without CONSULT-II 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2) Check voltage between ECM terminal 42 (PNP switch signal) and body ground under the following conditions. Condition (Gear position) SEF137X “P” (A/T only) and “N” position Except the above position 3) Voltage (V) (Known-good data) Approx. 0 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-562. EC-560 DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0430 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC722 EC-561 DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure For M/T Models Diagnostic Procedure For M/T Models 1 NCEC0431 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector. SEF740W 3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E101, E33 I Harness for open or short between PNP switch and body ground © 3 Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 42 and PNP switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. 4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F6, E123 I Harness for open or short between ECM and PNP switch © 5 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK PNP SWITCH Refer to MT-10, “Position Switch Check”. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Replace PNP switch. EC-562 DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure For M/T Models (Cont’d) 6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © GI INSPECTION END MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-563 DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure For A/T Models Diagnostic Procedure For A/T Models 1 =NCEC0432 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector. 3. Check continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF269W Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 2. 2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E101, E33 I Harness for open or short between PNP switch and body ground © 3 Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 42 and PNP switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 4. 4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F6, E123 I Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ECM © 5 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK PNP SWITCH Refer to AT-110, “Diagnostic Procedure”. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © Replace PNP switch. EC-564 DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure For A/T Models (Cont’d) 6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © GI INSPECTION END MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-565 IGNITION SIGNAL Component Description Component Description NCEC0319 IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR (BUILT INTO DISTRIBUTOR) NCEC0319S01 The ignition coil is built into distributor. The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to the power transistor. The power transistor switches on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. As the primary circuit is turned on and off, the proper high voltage is induced in the coil secondary circuit. The distributor is not repairable and must be replaced as an assembly except distributor cap and rotor head. SEF848X CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0320 MONITOR ITEM IGN TIMING CONDITION I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: “N” No-load SPECIFICATION Idle 15°±2° BTDC 2,000 rpm More than 25° BTDC ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0321 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0.3V [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed SEF996V 35 W/B Ignition signal Approximately 0.5V [Engine is running] I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEF997V EC-566 IGNITION SIGNAL ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d) TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) GI Approximately 13V MA [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed EM SEF998V 36 G Ignition check LC Approximately 13V [Engine is running] I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm FE SEF999V CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-567 IGNITION SIGNAL Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0324 TEC796 EC-568 IGNITION SIGNAL Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0325 INSPECTION START GI Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and restart engine. Is engine running? MA Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 2. Yes (Without CONSULTII) © GO TO 3. No © GO TO 4. 2 EM LC CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION With CONSULT-II 1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Make sure that all circuits do not produce a momentary engine speed drop. FE CL MT AT SEF070Y AX OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © GO TO 9. SU BR 3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Without CONSULT-II 1. Let engine idle. 2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminal 36 and ground with an oscilloscope. 3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below. ST RS BT HA SC SEF920Z OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © GO TO 9. EL IDX EC-569 IGNITION SIGNAL Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. SEF848X 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between terminal 8 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF257W Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness connectors E75, M6 I ECM relay I 15A fuse I Harness for open or short between ignition coil and fuse © Repair harness or connectors. EC-570 IGNITION SIGNAL Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect distributor harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between terminal 5 and engine ground. GI MA EM LC SEF258W Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 7 CL MT CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and distributor terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8 FE CHECK IGNITION COIL, POWER TRANSISTOR, RESISTOR AT AX SU BR Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-573. OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © Replace malfunctioning component(s). ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-571 IGNITION SIGNAL Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 9 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II 1. Stop engine. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. SEF848X 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 4. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 7 and ECM terminal 36. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 10. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-572 IGNITION SIGNAL Component Inspection Component Inspection =NCEC0326 IGNITION COIL 1. 2. NCEC0326S01 Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. Check resistance as shown in the figure. GI MA EM LC SEF237X 3. 4. For checking secondary coil, remove distributor cap. Check resistance between ignition coil harness connector terminal 8 and coil tower metal tip 9 (secondary terminal) on the distributor head. Terminal Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 7 - 8 (Primary coil) Approximately 0.8Ω 8 - secondary terminal on distributor head (Secondary coil) Approximately 16 kΩ CL MT If NG, replace distributor. SEF238X POWER TRANSISTOR 1. 2. NCEC0326S02 Disconnect distributor harness connector. Check power transistor resistance between terminals 5 and 7. Terminals FE Resistance Result Except 0Ω OK 0Ω NG AT AX 5 and 7 SU If NG, replace distributor. BR SEF943X RESISTOR 1. 2. Disconnect resistor harness connector. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Resistance: 4 - 8 kΩ [at 25°C (77°F)] If NG, replace distributor cap. NCEC0326S03 ST RS BT HA SEF944X SC EL IDX EC-573 INJECTOR Component Description Component Description NCEC0435 The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs. SEF138X CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0436 MONITOR ITEM INJ PULSE-B1 B/FUEL SCHDL CONDITION SPECIFICATION I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: “N” No-load Idle 2.4 - 3.2 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.8 msec I I I I Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: “N” No-load Idle 1.0 - 1.6 msec 2,000 rpm 0.7 - 1.3 msec ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0437 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMIWIRE NAL COLOR NO. ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed 101 103 105 107 R/B Y/B G/B L/B Injector Injector Injector Injector No. No. No. No. 1 2 3 4 SEF011W BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEF012W EC-574 INJECTOR Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0434 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC724 EC-575 INJECTOR Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0438 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF190Y 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. MEC703B Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © GO TO 2. EC-576 INJECTOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 2 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY Stop engine. Disconnect injector harness connector. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. GI MA EM LC SEF949X FE OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © GO TO 3. 3 CL MT DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I 10A fuse I Harness connectors M62, F24 I Harness connectors F13, F51 I Harness for open or short between injector and fuse © AT AX Repair harness or connectors. SU 4 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between injector harness connector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 101, 103, 105, 107. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. 5 ST RS BT DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART HA Check the following. I Harness connectors F51, F13 I Harness for open or short between ECM and injector © BR SC Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EL IDX EC-577 INJECTOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 6 CHECK INJECTOR 1. Disconnect injector harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure. SEF964XA OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © Replace injector. 7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-578 START SIGNAL CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0441 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM START SIGNAL CONDITION SPECIFICATION I Ignition switch: ON , START , ON MA OFF , ON , OFF ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0442 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 41 WIRE COLOR B/Y ITEM GI CONDITION EM LC DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V [Ignition switch “START”] 9 - 14V FE Start signal CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-579 START SIGNAL Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0440 TEC725 EC-580 START SIGNAL Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 =NCEC0443 INSPECTION START GI Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes © GO TO 2. No © GO TO 3. 2 MA EM CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION LC With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. Check “START SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions. FE CL MT SEF227Y AT OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © GO TO 4. 3 AX SU CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to “START”. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 41 and ground under the following conditions. BR ST RS BT HA SEF142X SC MTBL0143 EL OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © GO TO 4. IDX EC-581 START SIGNAL Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M62, F24 I 10A fuse I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-582 FUEL PUMP System Description System Description Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor Engine speed Ignition switch Start signal NCEC0444 ECM function ECM GI Actuator MA Fuel pump relay The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine startability. If the ECM receives a 180° signal from the camshaft position sensor, it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to perform. If the 180° signal is not received when the ignition switch is on, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump. Condition EM LC Fuel pump operation Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 5 seconds Engine running and cranking FE Operates When engine is stopped Stops in 1 second Except as shown above Stops CL MT Component Description NCEC0501 A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank. AT AX SU BR AEC801 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ST CONDITION RS NCEC0445 MONITOR ITEM FUEL PUMP RLY SPECIFICATION I Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 5 seconds) I Engine running and cranking I When engine is stopped (stops in 1.0 seconds) ON I Except as shown above OFF BT HA SC EL IDX EC-583 FUEL PUMP ECM Terminals and Reference Value ECM Terminals and Reference Value =NCEC0446 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 21 WIRE COLOR B/P ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch “ON”] I For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON” [Engine is running] 0 - 1V [Ignition switch “ON”] I More than 5 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON” BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Fuel pump relay EC-584 FUEL PUMP Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0447 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC726 EC-585 FUEL PUMP Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0448 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. Pinch fuel feed hose with fingers. SEF858X Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 5 seconds after ignition switch is turned “ON”. OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © GO TO 2. 2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY-I 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect fuel pump relay-1. SEF185XA 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. Check voltage between fuel pump relay-1 terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF950X OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © GO TO 3. EC-586 FUEL PUMP Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I 15A fuse I Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay-1 © 4 GI MA Repair harness or connectors. EM CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II 1. Check voltage between fuel pump relay-1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. LC FE CL SEF951X OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © GO TO 5. MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-587 FUEL PUMP Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY-III 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect fuel pump relay-2. SEF291WA 3. Check voltage between fuel pump relay-2 terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. SEF479P Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © GO TO 6. 6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E75, M6 I 15A fuse I Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay-2 © 7 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK POWER SUPPLY-IV 1. Check continuity between fuel pump relay-2 terminal 5 and fuel pump relay-1 terminal 3, fuel pump relay-2 terminal 2 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-588 FUEL PUMP Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 8 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY-2 Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-591. GI OK or NG OK © GO TO 15. NG © Repair or replace fuel pump relay-2. 9 MA EM CHECK POWER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector. LC FE CL SEF299WA 3. Check harness continuity between fuel pump terminal 2 and body ground, fuel pump terminal 1 and fuel pump relay-1 terminal 5. MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA AEC758 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © GO TO 10. SC EL IDX EC-589 FUEL PUMP Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 10 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M74, B102 I Harness for open or short between fuel pump and body ground I Harness for open or short between fuel pump and fuel pump relay-1 © 11 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 21 and fuel pump relay-1 connector terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 13. NG © GO TO 12. 12 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay-1 NG 13 © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY-1 Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-591. OK or NG OK © GO TO 14. NG © Replace fuel pump relay-1. 14 CHECK FUEL PUMP Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-591. OK or NG OK © GO TO 15. NG © Replace fuel pump. 15 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-590 FUEL PUMP Component Inspection Component Inspection =NCEC0449 FUEL PUMP RELAY-1 AND -2 NCEC0449S01 Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5. Conditions Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No GI MA EM If NG, replace relay. LC SEF511P Under rear seat cushion Fuel pump harness connector 2 1 FUEL PUMP 1. 2. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Resistance: 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] If NG, replace fuel pump. NCEC0449S02 FE CL MT SEF326W AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-591 POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Component Description Component Description Power steering oil pressure switch harness connector NCEC0451 The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and adjust for the increased load. RH strut tower SEF327W CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0452 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PW/ST SIGNAL CONDITION I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine SPECIFICATION Steering wheel in neutral position (forward direction) OFF The steering wheel is fully turned ON ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0453 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 46 WIRE COLOR SB ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] Power steering oil pressure I Steering wheel is fully turned switch [Engine is running] I Steering wheel is not turned EC-592 DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V Approximately 5V POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0450 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC727 EC-593 POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 =NCEC0454 INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes © GO TO 2. No © GO TO 3. 2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check “PW/ST SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions. SEF228Y OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © GO TO 4. 3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 46 and ground under the following conditions. SEF148X MTBL0142 OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © GO TO 4. EC-594 POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between power steering oil pressure switch terminal 2 and engine ground. GI MA EM LC AEC760 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. FE OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. CL MT 5 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 46 and terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. AT AX OK or NG OK © GO TO 7. NG © GO TO 6. SU BR 6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors F24, M62 I Harness for open or short between ECM and power steering oil pressure switch © 7 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH ST RS BT Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-596. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © Replace power steering oil pressure switch. 8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END HA SC EL IDX EC-595 POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Component Inspection Component Inspection NCEC0455 POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 1. 2. Conditions SEF419T NCEC0455S01 Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector then start engine. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2. Continuity Steering wheel is being turned Yes Steering wheel is not being turned No If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch. EC-596 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Description Description NCEC0638 The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. GI MA EM LC SEF855X FE CL SEF099XA ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0663 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 58 74 111 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) B Sensor’s ground [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Idle speed R/L Refrigerant pressure sensor [Engine is running] I Warm-up condition I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON” (Compressor operates.) 0.36 - 3.88V [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V P/L Sensor’s power supply Approximately 0V MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-597 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0639 TEC733 EC-598 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0640 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION GI 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “ON”. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 74 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. MA EM LC SEF952X FE OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © GO TO 2. CL MT 2 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “OFF”. 2. Stop engine. 3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. AT AX SU BR ST SEF855X 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. RS BT HA SC SEF953X EL OK or NG OK © GO TO 4. NG © GO TO 3. IDX EC-599 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E75, M6 I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor © 4 Repair harness or connectors. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 6. NG © GO TO 5. 5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E75, M6 I Harness connectors M95, F31 I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor © 6 Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 8. NG © GO TO 7. 7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors E75, M6 I Harness connectors M62, F24 I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor © 8 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to HA-79 or HA-181, “Refrigerant pressure sensor”. OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. EC-600 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © GI INSPECTION END MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX EC-601 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCEC0664 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM LOAD SIGNAL CONDITION I Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Rear window defogger switch “ON” ON and/or lighting switch “2ND” Rear window defogger switch and lighting switch “OFF” OFF ECM Terminals and Reference Value NCEC0665 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERWIRE MINAL COLOR NO. 50 R ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] I Rear window defogger switch “ON” and/or lighting switch “2ND” BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] I Rear window defogger switch and lighting switch “OFF” Approximately 0V Electric load signal EC-602 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0641 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC728 EC-603 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Wiring Diagram (Cont’d) TEC729 EC-604 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Diagnostic Procedure Diagnostic Procedure 1 NCEC0642 INSPECTION START GI Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes © GO TO 2. No © GO TO 4. 2 MA EM CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I LC With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions. FE CL MT SEF229Y AT OK or NG OK © GO TO 3. NG © GO TO 6. 3 AX SU CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions. BR ST RS BT HA SEF230Y OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © GO TO 10. SC EL IDX EC-605 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 4 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 50 and ground under the following conditions. SEF956X OK or NG OK © GO TO 5. NG © GO TO 6. 5 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 50 and ground under the following conditions. SEF957X OK or NG OK © INSPECTION END NG © GO TO 10. 6 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION 1. Start engine. 2. Turn “ON” the rear window defogger switch. 3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up? Yes or No Yes © GO TO 7. No © Refer to EL-121, “Rear Window Defogger”. EC-606 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 7 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT Stop engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect rear window defogger relay. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and rear window defogger relay terminal 5. GI MA EM LC SEF958X 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. FE OK or NG OK © GO TO 9. NG © GO TO 8. CL MT 8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness connectors E75, M6 I Diode M93 I Diode M94 I Harness for open and short between ECM and rear window defigger relay © 9 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. AT AX SU BR CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © 10 ST INSPECTION END CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION RS 1. Start engine. 2. Turn the lighting switch “ON” at 2nd position. 3. Check that headlamps are illuminated. BT OK or NG OK © GO TO 11. NG © Refer to EL-30, “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” or EL-42, “HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM”. HA SC EL IDX EC-607 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d) 11 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT Stop engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect lighting switch harness connectors. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and lighting switch terminals 9, 10 under the following conditions. SEF959X 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK © GO TO 13. NG © GO TO 12. 12 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. I Harness connectors M49, F23 I Harness connectors E75, M6 I Diode M94 I Harness for open and short between ECM and lighting switch © 13 Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-146. © INSPECTION END EC-608 MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram NCEC0466 GI MA EM LC FE CL MT AT AX SU BR ST RS BT HA SC EL IDX TEC730 EC-609 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Regulator Fuel Pressure Regulator Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2, psi) NCEC0467 Vacuum hose is connected Approximately 235 (2.4, 34) Vacuum hose is disconnected Approximately 294 (3.0, 43) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing NCEC0468 Target idle speed*1 rpm No-load*3 (in “P” or “N” position) Air conditioner: ON rpm In “P” or “N” position 850 or more In “P” or “N” position 15°±2° BTDC Ignition timing*2 Throttle position sensor idle position *1: *2: *3: I I I 800±50 V 0.15 - 0.85 Throttle position sensor harness connector connected Throttle position sensor harness connector disconnected Under the following conditions: Air conditioner switch: OFF Electrical load: OFF (Lights & rear window defogger) Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position Ignition Coil Primary voltage V NCEC0469 Battery voltage (11 - 14) Primary resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω Secondary resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 0.8 kΩ Approximately 16 Mass Air Flow Sensor NCEC0470 Supply voltage V Battery voltage (11 - 14) Output voltage V 1.3 - 1.7* Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) 2.5 - 5.0 at idle* 7.1 - 12.5 at 2,500 rpm* g·m/sec *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and idling under no-load. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 EGR Volume Control Valve Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Ω Between terminals 1-2, 2-3, 4-5 and 5-6 NCEC0471 NCEC0671 20.9 - 23.1 EGR Temperature Sensor NCEC0472 EGR temperature °C (°F) Voltage V Resistance MΩ 0 (32) 4.56 0.73 - 0.89 50 (122) 2.25 0.074 - 0.082 100 (212) 0.59 0.012 - 0.014 EC-610 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pump Fuel Pump NCEC0473 Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω GI 0.2 - 5.0 IACV-AAC Valve NCEC0474 Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Ω Injector NCEC0475 Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Ω EM 13.5 - 17.5 LC Resistor Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] MA 20 - 24 NCEC0476 kΩ 4-8 Throttle Position Sensor Throttle valve conditions NCEC0477 FE Voltage (at normal operating temperature, engine off, ignition switch ON, throttle opener disengaged) Completely closed (a) CL 0.15 - 0.85V Partially open Between (a) and (b) Completely open (b) MT 3.5 - 4.7V Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater (Front) Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω NCEC0478 AT 2.3 - 4.3 AX Calculated Load Value NCEC0479 Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST) At idle 20.0 - 35.5 At 2,500 rpm 17.0 - 30.0 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Temperature °C (°F) Resistance BR NCEC0480 2.1 - 2.9 80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38 EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Valve RS BT NCEC0481 22 - 26 Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater (Rear) Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω HA NCEC0483 SC 2.3 - 4.3 Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Ω ST kΩ 20 (68) Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Ω SU NCEC0484 EL 166 - 204 IDX EC-611 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 EC-612 =NCEC0485
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.2 Linearized : Yes Create Date : 1910:00:60 21:13:01 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 3.0J (Windows 版) Creator : Parlance Publisher 5.0/(Xyvision Postscript Formatter) 3.0 3 Title : No Job Name Modify Date : 2000:06:13 09:55:34 Page Count : 612 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Layout : SinglePageEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools